DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

Appendix to the Journals of the House of Representatives, 1865 Session I, A-05

A.—No. 5.

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

PRESENTED TO BOTH HOUSES OP THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY, BY COMMAND OE HIS EXCELLENCY.

WELLINGTON.

1865.

JfOTB. —Enclosures found missing in their proper places will be found appended in a supplementary form, after page 69, as they come to hand.

A.—No. 5.

No. 1. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretaet of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Auckland, 3rd January, 1865. In my Despatch No. 155, of the 31st of October last, I transmitted for your information a Memorandum by the Colonial Secretary in relation to the Native prisoners taken at Bangiriri, which contained the following statement: — " That the hulk ' Marion' was visited, lastly, twice by Mr. Justice Johnston, of the Supreme Court, ex-official visitor of all the prisons in the Colony, who on each occasion spent a considerable time on board, and never intimated to the Colonial Government the least dissatisfaction with anything he saw." 2. I have now the honor to transmit the copy of a letter from Mr. Justice Johnston, explaining that he made but one visit to the vessel, which was in no sense an official one, and that therefore the inference drawn by my recent Advisers from the Judge's visit to the hulk, aud his subsequent silence respecting it, is obviously without foundation. I have, Ac, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 2. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary or State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Auckland, sth January, 1865. I have the honor to transmit an humble petition to the Queen from the Provincial Council of the Province of Auckland, praying that Her Majesty will be pleased, in concurrence with the Imperial Parliament, to take such steps as will secure the separation of the Province of Auckland from the Southern portions of the Colony of New Zealand, by itself, or with such other portions of the Northern Island as may be deemed expedient, with such a constitution as will enable Her Majesty's Imperial Government to exercise such control over Native affairs, until a cordial good feeling between the races shall have been restored, as will enable it to secure the fulfilment of the treaty obligations undertaken by Her Majesty, and promote the good government of Her Majesty's subjects, both Native and European. 2. I only received this petition yesterday, and therefore fear I shall not by this mail have time to make a full report upon the important question raised in it. By the next mail I will however transmit such a report, and in the meantime I will only say, that I think, unless some such arrangement as is prayed for by the Provincial Council of Auckland, is carried out, it will be impossible to bring to a satisfactory termination the difficulties prevailing in this country. I have, &c., The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 3. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaey of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 6th January, 1865. I have been requested by my Eosponsible Advisers to transmit for your information a copy of the enclosed resolution of the Legislative Council of New Zealand, relative to the removal of the Seat of Government from Auckland to Wellington. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geey. No. 4. His Excellency the Goveenoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaky of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 7th January, 1865. I have the honor to transmit herewith a Memorandum I have received from my Eesponsible Advisers, in which they explain the principles of the policy on which they propose to act. 2. They have not yet given to me the details, military or financial, of the plans by which they intend to give effect to that policy. Immediately I receive these, I will make a report to you upon the entire subject. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geey. No. 5. His Excellency the Govebnor to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaey of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Auckland, 7th January, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information copies of reports which I have received A.

No.. 2.

No. 3. Petition from Provincial Council, 23rd Dec, 1864.

No. 5. Vide Journal Leg. Council, p. 17, 1864.

' No. 10. Vide A. No. 1, PP- 1-3.

No. 11. Col. Greer to D. Q. G., 14th Dec, 1864.

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5.

from Colonel G-rccr, C.8., commanding the Forces at Tauranga, and from Mr. Eicc, the interpreter to the Forces at the same place, from which you will regret to learn that almost tiie entire population of Tauranga, who recently submitted to the Queen's authority, have become infatuated under the influence of the fanatical faith which has been propagated by the false prophet who has appeared in this country, and that abandoning all their property, they have betaken themselves to the mountains where the rebel Natives arc. 2. A considerable number of the leading Tauranga chiefs were in Auckland when the event took place, and they are at once returning there to try to induce their people to retrace this foolish step. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G-. Grey. No. 6. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secret.vby of State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, Auckland, 7th January, 18G5. I have been requested to forward for your information a copy of a petition to the Queen, which is, I am informed, being almost universally signed by the inhabitants of the Province of Auckland, praying that this part of New Zealand may be constituted a separate Colony, with a constitution different from that which New Zealand now possesses, until the present difficulties have been brought to a close. The original of this Petition shall be transmitted by the next mail, with a full report upon the subject. I have, &c., The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 7. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Silt, — Government House, Auckland, 7th January, 1865. In my Despatch No. 151, of the 27th of October last, I transmitted for your information the copy of a Proclamation I had issued on the 25th of the same month, in which, in conformity with your instructions, I stated that Her Majesty's clemency would be extended to all persons concerned in the existing rebellion, who might on or before the 10th day of December, come in and take the oath of allegiance, and make the cession of such territory as might be fixed by the Lieut.-General and myself. 2. In my Despatch No, 181, of the 9th December last, I transmitted the copy of a letter from the chief William Thompson, in which he begged for an extension of time during which the Natives might be free to accept the terms which had been offered in the Proclamation of the 25th October. 3. I have now the honor to transmit the copy of a Proclamation I issued upon the 17th of December last, with the advice of my Responsible Advisers, in which I virtually repeated the terms offered to the rebel Natives in my Proclamation of the 25th of October, with this difference, that having consulted with the Lieut.-General, we arranged in as far as possible the boundaries of the territory which might be regarded as conquered territory, and which we thought ought to be ceded to the Crown ; and then in this case in which we were able to fix the boundaries of these lands I notified in my Proclamation that such lands would be retained and held as lands of the Crown. 4. I pointed out in my Despatch No. 181, of the 9th of December, that, in as far as the lands thus defined in the Waikato country were concerned, the Natives had on several occasions declared that they would not in any manner interfere in our occupation of them. ( I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 8. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, —■ Government House, Auckland, 7th January, 1565. I have the honor, at the request of my Responsible Advisers, to transmit for your information three resolutions passed at a public meeting held at New Plymouth, on the 31st ultimo, deprecating the efforts which arc being made by the inhabitants of Auckland to have that Province created a separate Colony. I have, &c, The Eight'llon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 9. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Auckland, 7th January, ISGS. i I have the honor at the request of the Superintendent of the Province of Auckland, to transmit for your information a letter he lias addressed to me, containing certain resolutions which were moved in both Houses of the General Assembly, in favor of the Northern part of New Zealand being constituted a separate Colony. 2. These resolutions are reported on by my Besponsible Advisers in their Memorandum enclosed in my Despatch No. 10, of this day's date. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet.

No. 12.

No. 13.

PW«N.Z. Gazette 17th Dec, 186 i, No. 19, p. 461.

No. 14. Supt. Tarnnnki to Col. Bec.,BrdJan., 1865.

No. 15. Supt. Auckland to Sir &. Ciw, 7th .fan., 18G5.'

2

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OE NEW

A.—No. 5.

No. 10. His Excellency the Goyekxor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Coloxies. ■Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 7th January, 1865. My Eesponsible Advisers, being anxious to raise a Colonial Force of about 1,500 men to enable them to recommend a reduction in Her Majesty's troops now serving in this Colony, have requested me to transmit for your consideration the enclosed letter, in which they beg to be permitted to enlist from the Queen's Kegimenta now serving in this Colony, a number not exceeding fifteen hundred of limited service men, who may be induced to enter into the Colonial service by offers of an increased rate of pay, a shorter time of service, and grants of land. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwcll, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure to No. 10. The Hon. Colonial Seceetaby to His Excellency the Goyerxoe. .Sic, — Colonial Secretary's Office, Auckland, 7th January, 1805. I have respectfully to request that your Excellency will be pleased to represent to the Home Government the desire of the Colonial Government to form a Colonial Defence Force, and to enlist for that service from the regiments now in the Colony a number not exceeding fifteen hundred (1,500) limited service men, who may be induced to enter into the Colonial Service by offers of an increased rate of pay, a shorter term of service, and grants of land. The object of the Colonial Government in the formation of this force is to relieve Her Majesty's troops from their present service in the Colony at the earliest possible period. I have, &c, "Walter Maxtell, His Excellency Sir George Grey, X.C.8.. (for the Colonial Secretary.) No 11. His Excellency the Goyerxor to the Eight Hon. the Secretaky of State for the Colonies. ■Sir, — Government House, Auckland, Cth February, 1865. I have the honor at the request of the executor of the late James Armitagc, Esq., to transmit the copy of a letter addressed to you, regarding damages inflicted on the late Mr. Armitage's property. 2. Mr. Armitage fell in Her Majesty's service, and I trust that the claims urged on his behalf may receive such consideration as may be found possible. I have, &c, ' The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure 1 to No. 11. J. H. Ceawfoed, Esq., to His Excellency the Goverxoe. His, — Auckland, New Zealand, 19th January, 1865. I have the honor to enclose the copy of a petition to the House of Commons by the executor of the late James Armitage, Esq., and a letter intended to cover the same to the Eight Honourable the Secretary of State ; and I beg that your Excellency will have the goodness to forward them to the Secretary of State by the first opportunity, with or without comment as your Excellency may think fit. I have, &c., His Excellency Sir George Grey, K.C.B. Jas. H. Ceawford. Enclosure 2 to No. 11. J. 11. Ceawfoed, Esq. to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Coloxies. Sir, — Auckland, New Zealand, 18th January, 1565. I have the honor to forward to you a copy of a petition which will be presented to the House ■of Commons from the executor of James Armitage, Esq., late of Milncsbridge House, in Yorkshire, who was killed by the insurgent Maoris, in New Zealand, in September, 1803, and whoso house and farm were destroyed by soldiers belonging to Her Majesty's army serving in New Zealand a few ■months afterwards. As I feel certain that you will on inquiry find the facts stated respecting this sad case to be true, I venture to hope that the prayer of the petitioner will meet with no opposition from you or Her Majesty's Government. I have, &c, Jas. H. Ceawfoed, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwcll, M.P. Solicitor for Mr. Armitage's Executor. No. 12. His Excellency the Goyeexor to the Eight Hon the Seceetaey of State for the Coloxies. Sir,— Government House, Auckland, 6th February, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information the copy of a report received from Colonel Grcer, C.8., commanding the troops at Tauranga. 2. 1 believe that Colonel Grcer most accurately represents the state of feeling amongst the Native population when he says —" The fact is the eyes of all Maoridom are on Taranaki—there is the head quarters of their ' Atua' or God; and if he cannot drive the Pakehas into the sea there, 1 think they will give up, as a bad bargain, all over this side of the Island." I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geey.

No. Hi. Mr. Mantel! to Sir G. Grey, 7th Jan., > 1805.

No. 21. Mr. Crawford to SirG. Orer, 10th Stm., 1865.'

No. 22. Colonel Giver to P.Q.M.G., 20th Jan., 1865.

3

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5. |

Enclosure to No. 12. Colonel H. H. Geeee to the Deputy Quaetebmasteb-Geneeal. Sib, — Camp Te Papa, Tauranga, 29th January, 1805. I have the honor to report for the information of the Lieut.-Gencral Commanding, that nothing of importance has occurred in this district since my last report. The Ngaiterangi chiefs have returned from the meeting at Waikato ; they state that their intention is peace. Most of the Ngaiterangi people have returned to their settlements; they have only partially given up Pai Marire; those who remain out state that they will not interfere with those who have come in, but that they will draw a line from the Wairoa, across by Te Eanga, and from thence towards Maketu, and that neither Queen's Natives nor Pakehas must cross it: of course that would be to undo all that has been done, and take back the land. I have sent Mr. Eice up to Hore Tupaea's settlement, in the ranges, (where I hear there is a prophet, and a good number of Pai Marire Maoris collected) to see what they are up to. The reports about the East Cape Natives coming to attack Maketu, are, as usual, conflicting. I don't think they will do anything of the sort; but the fact is, the eyes of all Maoridom are on Taranaki —there is thejhead quarters of their "Atua," or God ; and if he cannot drive the Pakeha into the sea there, I think they will give up, as a bad bargain, all over this side of the Island. I have, &c., The Deputy Quartermaster-General, &c., &c, H. H. Geeee, Head Quarters. Colonel Commanding Tauranga District. No. 13. His Excellency the Goveenoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetabt of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, Gth February, 1865. , I have the honor herewith to transmit a letter addressed by the celebrated chief "VVaka Nene to Her Majesty. 2. Waka None has been our consistent friend for years, through every war. He transmits at the same time, as a present to Her Majesty, a Mere Ponamu, of green jade, the native symbol of chieftainship, which are now of great value and rarity, and three New Zealand mats. 3. I did not think it judicious in the present state of the country in any way to check Waka Nene's affectionate loyalty to Her Majesty by refusing to send on his present, and have accordingly directed that it should this day be shipped for England, to your address, on board Her Majesty's ship " Miranda," Captain Jenkins, which this afternoon sails for England. I have, &c., The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. Enclosure to No. 13. E Tai c Te Kuini, — Akarana, New Zealand, Pepueri 1, 1865. Kanui toku aroha atu kia koe. Kia rongomai koe, c pupuru ana au ia Te Kawana, kia kaua ia c haereki Poneke, c rangi kia noho ia ki Akarana nei, hei titiro mo te taha ki nga Maori. NaE. Tai whakarongo mai tenei ano taku kumaha mau, me etahi kakahu hoki. Kia Te Kuini o Ingarangi. Heoi ano, Na toit hoa Pono. tohu Na Tasiati Waka m Nene. tohu [teanslation.] Auckland, New Zealand, February 1, 1865. O Lady the Queen, — Greeting. Great is my regard for you. Listen !I am endeavouring to keep the Governor here, to prevent his going to Wellington. It is better that he should remain in Auckland to overlook the Maoris. 0 Lady, hearken ! I send you a greenstone and some Maori mats. Enough. From your true friend, Tamati Waka Nene. No. 14. His Excellency the Goyebnor to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaey op State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, Auckland, 6th February, 1865. 0 I have the honor to transmit for your information copies of Despatches I have received from h Sir D. Cameron, reporting that upon the 25th ultimo (January, 1865) the rebel Natives, six hundred 1 strong, suddenly attacked his camp at Nukumaru, near Wanganui. 2. They attacked simultaneously the outlying picquets on the right and the front of the camp, which - being overpowered were forced temporarily to retire ; but the picquets being immediately reinforced, the Natives were repulsed with severe loss, leaving twenty-throe of their dead upon the field. I regret to say that our loss in this action, and in a skirmish on the previous clay, amounted to one officer, one non-commissioned officer, and fifteen men killed, and two officers and thirty-one men wounded. 3. Sir D. Cameron was about to continue his advance into the Ngatiruanui country upon the sth instant. I have, &c., The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Gbet.

No. 23. "WakaNene to the Queen, Ist Feb., 1805.

No. 24. Sir D. Cameron to Sir a. Grey, 80th January and 2nd February, 1865. Viilf A. No. 4.

4

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

■A.—No. 5

No. 15. His Excellency the Govebnoe to the Eight Hon. the Secretahy of State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, Auckland, 7th February, 1865. I have the honor herewith to transmit a petition addressed to Her Majesty by the Northern Members of the Legislative Council and of the House of Eepresentatives of the General Assembly of New Zealand, praying that the Northern portion of these Islands, occupied by the great bulk of the Native population, may be created temporarily into a separate Colony, \inder such a form of Government as may enable Her Majesty to protect the rights, to secure the safety, and to promote the welfare of both races of Her Majesty's subjects. 2. The enclosed letter from Mr. Cox which accompanies this petition shows that all the Northern Members of the House of Eeprcsentatives but three have signed this petition, and that their names will be shortly attached to it. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geey. Enclosure to No. 15. Secbetaby of the Nobtheen Association to His Excellency the Governoe. Sib, — Northern Association Office, Fort Street, Auckland, 7th February, 1865. I have the honor, with reference to the petition from the Members of the General Assembly, presented to your Excellency by a deputation of the Council of the Northern Association, to call your Excellency's attention to the fact that three of the Members of the House of Eepresentatives have not signed the petition. In explanation, I have to state that Messrs. Butler and Mason had requested Mr. Eussell to sign on their behalf; but it was thought advisable that no signatures should be attached, except by Members personally. Neither of these gentlemen, nor Mr. Munro, have been in Auckland since the petition has been drawn up : Mr. Mason being at Dunedin, in Otago, Mr. Munro at Wangarei, and Captain Butler at Mongonui. It will be seen, on reference to the division list upon the Eesolutions proposed in both Houses of the General Assembly on the 6th December last, that the Separation Movement received the support of the before-mentioned gentlemen. There is, therefore, every reason to believe that these gentlemen would have signed had an opportunity been offered them. I have, &c, E. J. Cox, His Excellency Sir G. Grey, K.C.B. Honorary Secretary. No. 16. His Excellency the Goyeenob to the Eight Hon. the Secbetaey of State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, Auckland, 7th February, 1865. I have the honor herewith to transmit a petition from the inhabitant s of the Province of Auckland, earnestly praying Her Majesty to temporarily constitute the Northern portion of this Island into a separate Colony. This petition (see enclosure) has already received 7920 signatures, whilst the signatures to it from the out-settlements have not yet been received. This petition is accompanied by a Memorandum which was placed in my hands by a deputation of the leading men in this Province, in which they explain in detail the reasons which have made them address this petition to the Throne. 2. My Eesponsible Advisers (see enclosure) have asked me to reserve my remarks on this petition until I have first received those which they wish to make on it. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geey. Enclosure 1 to No. 16. Secbetaey of the Noethebtt Association to His Excellency the Goyeenoe. Sib, — Northern Association Office, Fort Street, Auckland, 7th February, 18G5. I have the honor to state, for the information of your Excellency, that the petition to Her Majesty the Queen from the inhabitants of the Province of Auckland, presented to your Excellency yesterday for transmission to Her Majesty, containing seven thousand nine hundred and twenty signatures, is still incomplete. This arises from the remoteness of many of the settlements, and the scattered nature of the population, together with the uncertainty of the postal communication. I have also to state that, so far as I am aware, nearly all the male adult population of this Province will sign the petition, if a reasonable time be afforded them. It is expected that the greater portion of these signatures will arrive in town before the departure of the March mail, and I have the honor to request that your Excellency will be pleased to receive and forward such additional signatures. I have, &c, E. J. Cox, His Excellency Sir G. Grey, K.C.B. Honorary Secretary. Enclosure 2 to No. 16. MEMORANDUM for His Excellency the Goyebnob. As the Petitioners are desirous that the petition should go home by the mail closing this day, and being the only Minister at present at Auckland (my colleagues having gone to the Seat of Government at Wellington), it will be impossible that any remarks Ministers may wish to make can accompany this petition. I beg therefore respectfully to request that your Excellency will be pleased to reserve your own remarks upon this question, until you have received those of your Eesponsible Advisers, which shall be made with as little delay as possible. Colonial Defence Office, Auckland, 7th February, 1865. H. A. Atkinson. B

No-: 25. Mr. Cox to Sir G. Grey, 7th Feb., 1865.

No, 20. Petition. Mr. Cox to Sir GK Grey, 7th Fob., 1865. Hem. by Northern Association, 6th Feb., 1865. Mem. by Major Atkinson, 7th Feb. 1865.

5

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

L—No. 5.

No. 17. His Excellency tie Governor to tlie Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Auckland, Bth February, 1865. It is probable that you may see statements made in the newspapers to the effect that the chief William Thompson lias come in and given himself up. 2. I beg to explain that this is an entire mistake. He wrote me the enclosed letter expressing a wish for an interview. Captain Baker and Major Blcwitt were sent to arrange a time and place for the purpose, when William Thompson seemed to have in part changed his mind, as will be seen from the enclosed copy of a telegram I have received from General Carey. 3. I have answered that telegram b}- saying I understood that Thompson wished to see me, and that I therefore supposed he had made up his mind as to what ho wished to say to me. That if he still wished to see me I would meet him, and that he could speak to me on any subject he wished. The matter has as yet gone no further, but the whole Waikato country is perfectly quiet, and I regard the war as ended in this part of New Zealand. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. Enclosure 1 to No. 17. Father, Governor Gret, — Puketihitihi, 26th January, 1865. Salutations to you. I have seen your letter of the 17th instant; you say that it will be well for me to consider your«word. Yes: your word is good. I have been deliberating from the close of the war up to the present day, and now at your request I shall consider it (lit., turn it over) again, and if it is not clear to me, I shall tell you 1 am not able to sec my way to peace, —that we had better wait and watch for peace or whatever else there may be (wait the turn of events). Friend, —Were it not that I am afraid, I should be very glad to see you, that we might converse together, that is face to face, and not always on paper. Friend, —Tour advice is very good, —that I should meditate well upon your word. Yes; let it remain, and I will view it and think it over. From your friend, W. Tamiiiana. Enclosure 2 to No. 17. Brigadier-General Caret to His Excellency the Governor. Captain Baker says that W. Thompson is anxious to meet your Excellency, but at the same time wishes to know beforehand on what subject he may talk to you, —whether the boundary, the peace, or the King. In his letter to me, received last night, Thompson writes, "I will not go blindfolded and not see my way clearly, but with a stated reason it will be well, and my feet will not sleep." Please answer this, as I keep the messenger. sth February, 1865. No. 18. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Wellington, 2nd March, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information the copy of a letter which has been received from the E-esident Magistrate at Wanganui, enclosing a letter from the friendly Natives of that place, containing an account of a very important success which they had obtained on the 21th of February over the rebel Natives. 2. The loss of the rebels was about twenty-five killed on the field, and four chiefs of importance were taken prisoners. This marked success on the part of the friendly Natives will, I have no doubt, produce results very favourable for our interests, and tend much to bring about a termination of hostilities in that part of the country. 3. It is with much sorrow that I have to report that John Williams, a most faithful chief and excellent man, fell mortally wounded in this affair. Ever since the establishment of the Colony he has shown himself to be a most firm and consistent friend, and his death is sincerely regretted by large numbers of Europeans and Natives. I have, &c, The Eiglit Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. t G. Grey. Enclosure 1 to No. 18. D. S. Durie, Esq., to the Hon. the Attorney-General. Sir, — Besident Magistrate's Court, Wanganui, 23rd February, 1865. Eeferring to my report of 18th instant, I have now the honor to state that the General has been pleased to approve of the steps taken by the magistrates in forwarding the ammunition to the up-river friendly Natives. Enclosed is the copy of a letter from the Native Assessors at Jerusalem, from which they appear to be very grateful for the pi'ompt manner in which the magistrates acceded to their request for a supply of ammunition, their old stock being nearly exhausted. In consequence of this transaction, I consider it my duty to inform the Government that a very unsatisfactory feeling now exists between the Native assessors and Mr. White, and 1 would respectfully suggest that the Native Minister or some person in authority, should proceed at once to Wauganui without delay, in order to take such measures as may put a stop to a state of affairs that Buy cause serious embarrassment to the Government, and be prejudicial to the public service. I have, &c, The Hon. the Attorney-General, Wellington. D. S. Durie, E.M.

No. 27. » r. Thompson to ir G. Grey, 26th in., 1865. ■Jegrarn from eneral Carey to ir G. Grey,' Gill eb., 1865.'

No. 29.

6

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OE NEW

A.—No. 5

Wanganui, Jerusalem, 20th February, 1865. To Major Durie, Magistrate; to Richard Woon, to William Watt, to Mr. "Waters, to Mr. Cameron, to Major Eookes, and to all the European Magistrates of the town of Wanganui: — Salutations to you. Your love to us has arrived. We are thankful to you, and approve (of what you've done), and great is our rejoicing. It was from the quickness of your thought or decision that Messrs. Booth and Churton reached us in time; but rather from the goodness of the Almighty, for when they arrived the Queen's ammunition was expended, as also the Maori ammunition of old standing; for how could it be otherwise from fighting both night and day. Great is our love to you! Salutations to you under the protection of Queen Victoria. This is all, from your loving friends —Hori Kingi, Mete Kingi, Hoani Wiremu, Mawae, Haimiona, Aperaniko, Tamati, Erueti, Kepa, Pama Peritmi, Bini, Te Aro, Paora, and from all the Rananga and the principal tribes of the Queen. Enclosure 2 to No. 17. D. S. Dubie, Esq., to the Hon. the Attoexey-Genebal. Sic, — Resident Magistrate's Court, Wanganui, 21th February, 18G5. With reference to my report of yesterday's date, I have now the honor to forward for your information, the copy of a translated letter received this morning from our Native allies up the river, a copy of which has been sent to the General, and the commanding officer here. I am sorry to inform you that our principal chief, John Williams, (Hone Wiremu) has received a severe wound in the chest during a skirmish with the rebels yesterday; four of the latter have been killed. John Williams has been sent to hospital and well attended to. Nothing new from the front. The "Gundagai" is outside: report says the General is on board. I have, &c, The Hon. the Attorney-General, Wellington. D. S. Ditbie, E.M. Jerusalem, 23rd February, 1865. To Major Durie, to Mr. Cameron, to William Watt, to Major Eookes, and the other Magistrates,— Friends, —Salutations to you. On the 22nd instant, Eeneti Auohi's wife came over to us from the enemy. The cause was that Pehi had sent messengers toWaitotara, N gatiruanui, and Taranaki, for reinforcements, and requested them to give up the fighting there with General Cameron on the seaboard and to come and fight against us, in order that we might be overwhelmed, and they may turn their arms against the Europeans. Messengers have been despatched to Waitara, to fetch men and powder; as also to Waikato, to Taupo, to Eotorua, to Ngatiporou, and to all the tribes of this Island for support to fight against us and it is the intention of these tribes to erect a fortification below us, and thereby cut oft' the oommu-; nication between us and you. Friends, —Make haste and send the big guns to breach the enemy's fortifications, as our guns are of no avail for that purpose, and it is for you to supply us with the means for carrying on the fight, as we have forsaken Mr. White. Do you also arrange for a steamer to be put permanently on the Wanganui Eiver. Do you communicate with the Governor, with the General, with Mr. Mantell, and the Government, on the subject. Do you make haste and send the big guns, and if you consent acquaint us thereof. From your loving friends, under the protection of the Queen; —from John Williams, George King, Mete King, Mawai, Haimona Hiroti, Toma, Aperaniko, Kepa, from Hori Kerei; Paora, from Eini; Katene, from Neupena; Hakerei, from Tamati Pana. No. 19. His Excellency the Goyebxoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, Wellington, 2nd March, ISGS. I have been requested by my Eesponsible Advisers to transmit the Memorandum which they have prepared in answer to your Circular Despatch of the 25th of November last, in reference to the future conveyance of mails between Great Britain and these Colonies. I have the honor at the same time to transmit for your information a copy of the contract recently entered into by the Government of New Zealand for the conveyance of mails between Panama and this Colony. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 20. His Excellency the Goteejtob to the Eight Hon. the Secbetaey/ of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Wellington, 4th March, 18G5. At the request of my Responsible Advisers, I have the honor to transmit a petition addressed to the Queen by the Provincial Council of the Province of Wellington, praying Her Majesty not to sanction any measure which may have for its object the separation of New Zealand into different Colonies, or any alteration of the present constitution of New Zealand. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet.

No. 30,

No. 31

7

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No 5.

No. 21. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sib,— Wangaaui, 10th March, 1865. Adverting to my Despatch No. 29, of the 2nd instant, I have the honor to report that Pehi, the principal chief in this part of New Zealand, yesterday appeared before me and made his entire submission to Her Majesty's authority, undertaking to aid to the best of his ability in preserving the peace in so far as related to the Wanganui Eiver and adjacent district. He had already given a proof of the sincerity of his intentions by sending back to their country a reinforcement of about two hundred men. who had been despatched by the disaffected chiefs of Taupo to his assistance. 2. I feel satisfied that the line of conduct thus taken by Pehi will exercise an important influence upon other chiefs in this part of New Zealand, and I do not think I am too sanguine in saying that I regard it as a proof that the disturbances prevailing in New Zealand arc now drawing to a close. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geey. No. 22. His Excellency the Goveenor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies.J Sib, — Wanganui, 10th March, 18G5. I have the honor to transmit the copy of a Memorandum I have received from my Eesponsible Advisers, informing me that they have instructed the Crown Agents for the Colonies to deliver to the Imperial Treasury, New Zealand Debentures for £500,000, bearing interest at the rate of 4 per cent, per annum, with a view to the adjustment of the debt due by this Colony to the Imperial Government. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Gret. No. 23. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sib,— Wanganui, 10th March, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information copies of a correspondence relative to the capture of Hori Tupaea, a Tauranga chief, together with Te Tui Tamehana, a prophet of a fanatical sect, another prophet, and a number of their followers. 2. Colonel Greer, C.8., commanding at Tauranga, received information that these persons were proceeding to the East Coast, with a view of inducing the natives in that part of New Zealand to revolt. 3. I have known for some time that the disaffected chiefs viewed the new superstition which has sprung up, and which they term Pai Marire, as a bond of union which is to unite all discontented spirits in a last effort against the European race, and that in some instances they had determined to delay hostilities until the result of the mission of prophets to the East Coast had been ascertained. 4. The enclosed extracts from Hawke's Bay papers will show that it was known there that the object of the mission of these fanatics was to receive the adhesion of the natives to the so-called Maori King, and to bring about the overthrow of the Europeans. 5. Colonel Greer, having received the information I have above alluded to, directed the Arawa tribe, if these people attempted to make their way through their friendly territory, to seize the chief Tupaea, the two prophets, and their followers. This was accordingly done. When I heard of this transaction, I directed that Tupaea, the prophets, and six of their followers, should be sent to Auckland. G. On their arrival there, I found that Tupaea, who was an old friend of the Europeans, had expressed the greatest concern in having been in any way connected with the recent transaction, and had offered to make the fullest submission to the Queen's authority, and to aid in any manner he could in bringing about a lasting peace. 7. He had therefore not been treated as a prisoner, but as a gentleman on his parole. The conduct of the natives at Tauranga had also throughout the war been in every respect honorable, and such as entitled them to great consideration on our part. I therefore, upon Tupaea's frankly and readily entering into the engagements I have above stated, released him on parole, subject to the condition of his living at such place as the Governor might direct until the war had terminated. 8. The other prisoners, in conformity with the advice of my Eesponsible Advisers, I directed to bo brought to trial before a Court Martial, on a charge of endeavouring to incite Her Majesty's subjects to join in the present rebellion. 9. I have no doubt that the example of the submission of Tupaea to Her Majesty's authority will exercise a very considerable and favourable influence upon many persons of the Native race. I should perhaps add that the question of dealing with these prophets is surrounded with several difficulties, for they are believed by their deluded followers to possess supernatural powers, and it is generally thought that these will be manifested by their so blinding us that they will be let loose without suffering any punishment. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. Enclosure 1 to No. 23. Colonel Greee to the Deputy Quartermaster-General. Sir,— Camp Te Papa, Tauranga, 7th February, 18G5. I have the honor to enclose, for the information of the Lieutenant-General Commanding, correspondence with Mr. Smith, Civil Commissioner, Maketu, relative to the proposed intention of the Pai Marire prophet, Te Tiu Tamehana, and the chief Hori Tupaea, to proceed through the Arawa country towards the East Cape, and the intention of the Arawas to prevent their doing so.

No. 32.

No. 34. T0eA.8b.1,p.6.

No. 35. Enclosed.

8

DESPATCHES EROM THE GOVERNOR OE NEW

A.—No. 5,

The intention of Te Tiu Tamaliana is doubtless to stir up hostility to the Queen at the East, as he has been doing here and elsewhere. I therefore think, if he is prevented going there just at present, it will be well; and as he has only twenty or thirty followers, the Arawas can easily stop him if they choose to do so ; but Ido not anticipate that he would attempt to force his way through. If he did so he would lose the prestige of supernatural power which he at present claims, and effectually unmask the mischievous tendency of the l'ai Marire humbug. I have also the honor to enclose the translation of a letter received from the chief AVi Patene, giving his opinion that the Natives here intend going bade to the ranges, with hostile views, so soon as they have secured their crops. I find that other friendly chiefs arc of the same opinion, and I can perceive that the Natives are sulky and morose in their demeanour. However Ido not anticipate any renewed attempt at hostilities in this neighbourhood. I believe they are looking intently and with great expectation towards Taranaki, and their conduct here will be mainly guided by the intelligence they receive and credit from that quarter. I have, &c, H. GItEER, The Deputy Quartermaster-General. Colonel Commanding Tauranga District. T. B. Smith, Esq., to Colonel Geeeh. Sib, — Civil Commissioner's Office, Makctu, 3rd February, 1865. I have the honor to report for your information intelligence received by me yesterday, to the effect that the chief Hori Tupaea, with the Pai Marire prophet Tamihana, accompanied by an armed party of Tauranga Natives, have arrived at a settlement called Te Puke, on the Wairari branch of the Maketu River, about seven miles from this place. The Native who brought this information came from Te Puke, and returned immediately to watch the proceedings of this party. His statement has been taken down by the Native Assessor, Paul. I enclose the document and translation herewith; also a sketch showing the position of the places named. I am informed that there is a Native pa at To Kahika, which has recently been partially fortified, and it is supposed that it is intended to be made a rendezvous for the disaffected Natives from Kotorua and Tauranga. I am informed that there is a Native footpath from Te Puke to Karikari (inland of Maungatapu), but it is not practicable for horses ; there is a path also from the north-west side of Rotorua Lake to Te Puke of a similar character ; there is also a path from Maketu to Kenaua. The Maketu River is navigable for canoes for some miles beyond Kenaua ; the Wairau branch is also navigable for canoes as far as To Kahika. It is reported here that Natives to the number of two hundred are now assembled at Te Puke; but I believe the number has been gi-eatly exaggerated. It is however probable that Hori Tupaea's party will be joined by the Ngatirangiwewchi from Rotorua, who have nearly all gone over to the Pai Marire superstition. Under these circumstances, it would be useless for the civil power to attempt the arrest of Tamehana. I am unable to say how far the Arawa Natives would be prepared to co-operate in any militaryoperations undertaken for the purpose of taking or dispersing the Pai Marire fanatics. The Ngatiwhakane branch appear quite prepared to adopt vigorous measures for the purpose, but I have not yet been able to ascertain the views of the other sections of the Arawa. I have little doubt that volunteers could bo had, if required, to act in conjunction with the military ; and, even were they willing, I think it would not be desirable to employ them in any other way. Dr. Nesbitt has kindly undertaken to be the bearer of this letter to you. This gentleman is in possession of my views, and can furnish detailed information upon many points in connection with the state of things here, which may assist you in deciding upon the course to be adopted, and which could not so conveniently be conveyed by letter. I have, &c., Colonel Grrecr, Commanding H.M. Forces, Tuos. 11. Smitii, Tauranga. Civil Commissioner. [thaxslaticot.] Maketu, 2nd February, 1865. This is to report that a man from To Puke has come here to Maketu. His name is Eparaini, and! he belongs to the Papuiki tribe. He stated as follows: — Hori Tupaea and Tamihana Tiu have arrived nt Te Puke. Their party mimbered thirty, and there were twenty from Rotorua, making fifty altogether. He thinks, however, that the number is a hundred by this time, as men are arriving continually during these few days. These are the words of Tiu, which he heard: — 1. That all the King's people should assemble at Te Puke. 2. That they should then consider about writing a letter hither to Maketu, to ask permission of the people of Maketu for Tiu to pass this way on his journey to the southward; that if the Maketu people refused, then Tiu said a letter was to bo written to each of the other places of the Arawa ; and if all those refused, then he would come right on to Maketu. Eparaini, however, did not hear anything said about fighting. All he knows is, that he saw that the men carried arms. This looks like fighting, especially when it is said that they propose coming; openly here to Maketu. This is all the statement that Eparaini made to us. Paul Te Amohau. lla>-e Haka. Peteba Pakuatua. C

9

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—3S To. 5,

Colonel Greek to T. H. Skith, Esq., Civil Commissioner, Maketu. Sin, — Camp Te Papa, Tauranga, Ith February, 18G5. I have the honor to acknowledge receipt of your letter relative to the chief Hori Tupaea and Te Tin Tamahana having occupied a strong pa, and threatened to force their way through the Arawa country. 1 understand that you consider these men should be prevented going Eastward. I quite agree in that view. The latest accounts have shown that the East Cape Natives have returned to their homes, and intend to keep the peace. The intention of those chiefs is no doubt to stir them up again, and renew a hostile spirit among the enemies of the Arawas. I believe that they have not more than ten or twelve followers from this side, and I therefore think that if the Arawas state decidedly that they will arrest them if they attempt to pass through their land, it will have the effect of stopping them; and I think their doing so would be a blow to the Pai Marires, whether it stopped them or not. Dr. Nesbitt tells me that the Arawa people are likely to be divided as to the propriety of stopping them. Of course, if there is a difference of opinion, it would be better to let them pass than to have the Arawas fighting amongst themselves on such a subject 5 but it is peculiarly an Arawa question whether they allow firebrands like those men to go through their country for the purpose of stirring up their enemies. I think it would be undesirable to take any steps likely to bring about hostilities at present in this district ; but you who know the wishes of the Government, and are on the spot, can control this matter better than 1 can advise. I would not be justified in sending soldiers inland under any circumstances. 1 have just heard that Hori Tupaea has returned to Kai-Mai, and that Te Tiu Tamaliana has returned to Te Puke, meaning to go Eastwards, and lias about thirty followers from Waikato. I have, &c, T. 11. Smith, Esq., Civil Commissioner, H. H. Greek, Maketu. Colonel, Commanding Tauranga District. Te Matapihi, February C, 1865. To Colonel Gheer, Mr. Clabee, and Mr. Rice, — Friends, salutations. Listen you. I have discovered the thoughts (designs) of these people. I. They employ themselves at their ordinary work on the Sunday. 12. They are exalting their God over us. 8. When all their crops are gathered they will return inland, and will then work evil toward us (you and us). They call vs —young pigs. Friends, we are as it were in the grave. Great is the defiance of these people. We know their designs. Oh !I am overwhelmed with the smiting of my familiar friend. They are as young lions desiring to catch the prey. Friends, our efforts (expostulations) to stop this (Pai Marire) cease; we now leave it to you. Enough. From Whakaaro Moino. From Wikemu Patejje, Assessor. Enclosure 2 to No. 23. Lieut.-Colonel Geeee to the Deputt-Quaijtermasteb-Gexebal. Sin, —■ Camp Te Papa, Tanranga, 11th February, 1865. I have the honor to report for the information of the Lieut.-General Commanding that, in accordance with instructions sent by me to the chief's of the Arawa tribes (copy annexed), the chief Hori Tupaea and the Pai Marire prophet Te Tiu Taniahana, with about fifty followers, were captured (en route to the East Coast) near Eotoiti in the Arawa country, by the Ngatipikiao branch of the Arawa tribe, by whom they were brought into Maketu yesterday. I had the two chiefs mentioned, and a few of the principal men, forwarded under escort last night by land, and they arrived hero about nine o'clock this morning; 1 then had them taken into camp before the news spread, and without causing any excitement amongst the Natives. I had a meeting with all the chiefs of Ngaiterangi to-day, and they all seem satisfied that there will be the best results from the capture of the party ; in fact, that it will be a death blow to Pai Marire and disaffection in this district. The chiefs all urged me not to send the prisoners to Auckland, but to refer their case for the consideration of His Excellency the Governor; Mi-. 11. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, also considered that that would be the better course. I have accordingly retained them, pending reference. Hori Tupaea is on parole in cam]), Mr. Clarke answering for him; the remainder are close prisoners in the Monmouth Redoubt. It would be impossible to exaggerate the influence these Pai Marire priests had over the minds of the people; they believed them capable of performing all sorts ef miracles—one of which is of course In drive the Pa'kehas into the sea, and without the assistance of arms ; their astonishment has been proportionate on seeing them prisoners. I beg to remind you that it was Hori Tupaea and Te Tiu Tamaliana who recently drew the Ngaiterangi out to the bush, and to say the least, shook them in their allegiance to the Queen and to the promises they made when they surrendered. I have just seen Hori Tupaea : he has expressed his regret for the course he has pursued, and paid that it was' William Thompson who led him astray, but that he now sees his error and will return to the promise which he long ago made to the Governor, viz.—that he would be a loyal subject of the Queen. He added that be was prepared to take the oath of allegiance, and to pledge his word that he will support the peace made by the Governor with the Ngaiteraugi.

10

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OE NEW

A.—No 5

I beg to add that the prisoners were taken without bloodshed or fighting. I trust the course I have taken in this matter will meet with the approval of the Lieut.-General Commanding. I hxre, &c, The Deputy Quartermaster-General, Colonel H. H. Greer, "Head Quarters. Commanding Tauranga District. [Tr.A>*SLATION.] Tauranga. To William Marsh and all the Chiefs of the Arawas, — Greeting. I have heard that Hori Tupaea and the impostor Te Tiu Tamahana have proceeded towards the East Cape. It is probably their intention to correspond with the enemies of the Arawa and of the English with a view to mischief. Now tins is my word to you: when they go into your country catch them, and fetch them up to me. Do not fail in this matter. From your friend, H. H. Greer, Commanding Tauranga District. Enclosure 3 to No. 23. Colonel G-reer to the Deputy Quartermaster-General. Sir,— Camp Te Papa, 11th February, 1866. I beg to add to the foregoing report, that, in concert with Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner, we decided that the remainder of the prisoners who were left at Maketu last night (about forty-five or fifty) consisting of women and men of no importance, should be liberated. * I enclose a letter addressed to His Excellency the Governor by Hori Tupaea. I consider his submission and the arrest of Te Tiu Tamihana will establish peace, and put out Pai Marire here. Tho latter individual is, I am quite sure, ready to make any submission that may be required of him, to get himself out of the unpleasant position he is now in. They all seem quite subdued. I have, &c, The Deputy Quartermaster-General. H. H. Greet:, Head Quarters. Colonel Commanding District. [translation.] Hori Ketch Tupaea to His Excellency the Goternoh. To the Governor,— Te Papa, 11th February, ISGS. Friend, salutations. Know you that I have arrived at Te Papa, and the Colonel and myself have talked together. The Colonel has asked me my thoughts and intentions. I told him that I had now no" intentions (opposed to the Government) ; that I considered that my fault had been expiated by my being brought (prisoner) to Te Papa; that for the future I would return to my old allegiance to tho Governor. I shall remain here (not go inland again). The Colonel answered my word thus: " I will hold (rely upon) that word of yours, because it is the word of a chief." Now, O friend, I am awaiting a word from you. Here also is a word about the request of Ngaiterangi made to the Colonel respecting myself and my fellow-prisoners, that we should remain here and not go to Auckland. My request is the same : allow us to remain here. My words to you are ended. From your friend, To Sir George Grey, Government House, Hori Kingi Tupaea. Auckland. Enclosure 4 to No. 23. The Civil Commissioner, Tauranga, to the Hon. the Native Minister. y iß) Civil Commissioner's Office, Tauranga, 11th February, 1565. In my report of the 4th instant, I informed you that Hori Tupaea and Te Tiu Tamihana were actively engaged in propagating the Pai Marire superstition, and that their efforts were attended with considerable success. Thejr were then in the neighbourhood of Maketu. Colonel Greer, the officer commanding Her Majesty's forces in this district, viewing the Pai Marire as a system set up in direct antagonism to the Queen's Government, determined to check the spread of this" hostile fanaticism to the Eastward, and caused a letter to be written to the Arawa chief's requesting them to stop the progress of these men, and if they attempted to force their way through the Arawa country to apprehend them and bring them in to him. Hori Tupaea "and Tiu Tamihana, in defiance of all the Arawa remonstrances, were determined to go through the Arawa country, and the consequence was that Hori Tupaea, Tiu Tamihana (who had been described as being all-powerful), with a large retinue, were intercepted at Te Botoiti and taken prisoners. Mr. Eiee, the acting interpreter to the military forces happened to be at Maketu at flu; time the news of the capture arrived ; he, with praiseworthy diligence, immediately set out for tho Etotoiti, his principal object being to shield Hori Tupaea and the other prisoners from the insults of Te Arawa. Hori Tupaea speaks gratefully of Mr. Eice's protection. The principal prisoners arrived at the camp, Te Papa, this morning, after a weary march of thirtyeight miles. Immediately on the arrival of Hori Tupaea, all the most influential of the Tauranga chiefs had an interview with Colonel Greer, to beg of him not to send Hori Tupaea and the other prisoners on to Auckland, but to allow them to remain here until the Governor's pleasure was known.

11

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OP STATE.

A.—No. 5,

The Colonel, out of respect to the chiefs making the request, and to the general good character of the Ngaiterangi tribe, granted their desire. This has had a good effect already in allaying the excitement which must naturally exist on the captxire of so important a man as Hori Tupaea. Had the Colonel decided upon sending the prisoners to Auckland this excitement would have increased in a tenfold degree, and might have seriously affected the peace of the district for some time to come. Subsequently to the meeting above mentioned, Hori Tupaea had an interview with Colonel Greer. Hori Tupaea then distinctly stated, in my presence, that ho would adhere to the Governor's peace with the Ngaiterangi; that he would abandon the course he has lately been pursuing; that he would return to his former allegiance to the Governor. Hori Tupaea has himself, in a letter to His Excellency, stated his views. The Colonel has given orders on my recommendation for the release of all the other prisoners now at Maketu, considering the number now in camp quite sufficient for the purpose hoped to be gained. I have not the time to make any lengthy comment on the new aspect the whole question of the peace and quiet of this district must assume from the circumstances above related. The result of this firm step on the part of the military commander of this district must be beneficial if judiciously followed out. The Pai Marirc superstition, I believe, has received its death blow in this district. Hori Tupaea bears the reputation of being a man of his word, and I believe he will adhere to the promise he has made to Colonel Greer. I should have stated that Hori Tupaea is subjected to no undue restraint. The Colonel has had a tent pitched for his accommodation a few yards from this office. The determination of His Excellency respecting these prisoners is anxiously looked for. I have, &c, Hejcbt T. Clarke, The Hon. the Native Minuter, Civil Commissioner. Enclosure 5 to Xo. 23. MEMOKANDTJM by the Goyeexob. Tupaea on the ISth of February, 1865, promised to observe all these conditions : — 1. He will take the oath of allegiance. 2. He will truly and faithfully assist the Governor in putting an end to the present disturbances. 3. He will reside in such part of New Zealand as the Governor may from time to time point out, until the country is again in a tranquil state, and he receives the Governor's permission to return to his own country. 4. He will" faithfully observe the terms given by the Governor to the Tauranga Natives. G. Geey. Enclosure 6 to No. 23. Thos. H. Smith, Esq., to the Hon. the Natiye Seceetaey. Sic, — Civil Commissioner's Office, Maketu, 13th February, 1865. I have the honor to report for the information of the Government that a party of Pai Marire fanatics, attempting to pass through the Arawa country to the South, were intercepted at Te Eotoiti on the Bth instant, by a party of inland Natives, and have since been brought in and handed over to the military authorities. The leader of this party is a AVaikiitu chief named Tamihana Eikiriki, of Ngatiruru, who has gained considerable notoriety as a " Tiu " or prophet of the Hau Hau religion ; he was supposed to be endowed with wonderful supernatural powers. He was accompanied by the Tauranga chief Hori Kingi Tupaea, and was on his way to the East Coast for the purpose of making proselytes and preparing those tribes to take part in a combined and final effort, the success of which is believed to have been promised by revelation from Heaven, and which is to result in the destruction of the Europeans, and of all who refuse to embrace the new religion. An attempt was made to intercept this party on the Oth instant, when they passed within a few miles of this settlement, but it was unsuccessful in consequence of delay ia receipt of information respecting their movements. Colonel Greer had previously written to the Arawa chiefs intimating his wish that Tamihana and Tupaea should be taken and brought to him if they attempted to pass this way, but on my communicating with him after the Pai Marire expedition had entered the Arawa territory, he did not appear to consider it desirable to take any active measures for their apprehension, or to give the Arawa any positive directions on the subject. The latter, acting upon their own responsibility and at their own risk, have taken action which has stopped the Pai Marire expedition to the South, thereby preventing much mischief, placed in our power the men whose names and influence gave importance to the Pai Marire movement here, and exhibited the Hau Hau superstition as a detected imposture. The Arawa are somewhat apprehensive about the possible consequences of their act, and that there is some ground for their being so will appear from the accompanying translation of a letter received here last night. Being anxious to take advantage of this morning's mail I have reported thus briefly, but shall furnish more detailed information at an early date. I enclose a list of names of the Natives who composed Tamihana's party, and who were brought in with him and Hori Tupaea on the 10th to this place. Of these the nine indicated in the list were sent in by Major Kirby to Tauranga the same night with an escort of thirty men. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Secretary. Tiios. H. Smitii, Civil Commissioner.

12

DESPATCHES PROM THE GOVERNOR OE NEW

A.—Xo. 5,

Sub-Enclosure. To Ngatinenukukopako and Ngatirangi te Aorere, — Mokoia. 11th February, 1865. Fkiexds, —Hasten back to defend Waiohewa. On the 10th instant, Te Otirui went to Puhirua, and was asked by Ngatiinataku about Hori and the Jew, —the greatest thing is their Jew. Katini stood up and said, Welcome, &c. I thought that Eotorua consented to the decision of our fathers, that the door of jasper should not be opened in Eotorua; for this reason my hand was stayed instead of throwing you out, and I left you alone, although I disapproved of your work. I kept quiet; but now, in the day of my Jew, I have risen and become important, and you will be destroyed by me. Hitherto Auckland has been my fighting place, but now it will be Eotorua, and none of you shall escape my vengeance for the taking of my Jew. Do not suppose that my heart will be lenient to you; for your work this island will have satisfaction. It was decided by Te Hau that this should not be a time of war, because they are women and children without guns, powder, and pouches. Now you will be finished by me, that is by New Zealand. This is it, friends. Hasten back to work at our pa; come at once ; there will be great fighting at Eotorua; there will not be any fighting at the other places. From NESTTKrKOPAKO, and Ea>"gi te Aobeee, and all of us. Enclosure 7 to No. 23. T. H. Smith, Esq., to His Excellency the Goveenok. Mt dear Sib Geoege,— Maketu, 13th February, 1805. I take the liberty of writing privately to you on the subject of the apprehension of Hori Tupaea and the Tiu Tamihana, thinking it important that you should be possessed of information which I can only report officially to the Native Minister who may be in Wellington. Colonel Greer will I presume report the circumstances as tar as they are known to him, but it is possible that his report may omit references to some points upon which your Excellency would desire to be informed. For some time past a report has been in circulation to the effect that the Tiu Tamihana with a number of followers, intended to proceed from Tauranga to the South, for the purpose of making proselytes among the East Coast tribes, and that he would be accompanied by Hori Tupaea ; Colonel Greer wrote to the Arawa chiefs telling them to take these men if they came this way. On the 3rd instant, we heard that a party of eighty, composed of Waikato, Ngatiraukawa, and Tauranga Natives, accompanied by Hori Tupaea, had arrived at Te Puke, a settlement on the Maketu Eiver, some seven or eight miles distant. It was reported that a meeting was to be held there ; that disaffected Natives from various quarters were mustering there armed ; and that when arrangements were complete, the Tiu and his party would proceed on their way through the Arawa country, whether permission to do so were granted or refused. The number collected was estimated at from one hundred to two hundred. I communicated with Colonel Greer stating the circumstances, and that the Arawa would be willing to act in concert with the Military in any proceedings he might consider desirable to take for the purpose of intercepting the Pai Marire expedition. Colonel Greer replied by stating that he considered it peculiarly an Arawa question, and that it was undesirable to take any steps likely to bring about hostilities. On the 6th instant we received intelligence that the Pai Marire had started —that they appeared to be without arms, and numbered eighty-six persons, including women and children This information was received in the evening. An armed party at once went out but were too late to intercept the Pai Marire, who had passed some hours previously. On arriving at Te Eotoiti, they were observed, and a party of Ngatipikiao, Ngatinenukukopako, and Tuhourangi, quickly mustered, which followed, overtook, and made prisoners of them on the Bth instant. Having done so, they wrote to me to request that a party of soldiers should be sent to receive the prisoners, but afterwards decided to bring them to Maketu themselves. This was done on tlie 10th, several parties from Maketu going out to meet them on the way. Thinking it very desirable to avoid subjecting Hori Tupaea to any indignity, I arranged with Major Kirby, the officer in command here, that ho should not be taken into the Fort as a prisoner, but that upon the chiefs promising to be responsible for his safe keeping, he should be trusted with them for the night; this arrangement was however set aside by instructions received from Colonel Greer directing Major Kirby to send in the most important prisoners that night. This order was carried into effect, though not without remonstrance on the part of several of the Arawa chiefs, and complaints that they were treated with a want of courtesy and consideration in the matter. I succeeded in preventing the opposition from proceeding beyond a little noisy demonstration, and Colonel Greer's directions were carried out. While here I had some conversation with Hori Tupaea, who assured me that he had never committed himself in connection with the war. He admitted that he was to blame for not coming to see your Excellency when at Tauranga, saying that that was his only offence. He denied having written the letter to the Ngaiterangi which induced them to leave their homes in December last. He said he was merely travelling in company with the " Tiu," at the request of the latter ; that he had not joined the Pai Marire religion, and that he had not intended to go beyond Te Awa-o-te-Atua, where a relative of his had lately died. He said he was quite willing to go to Auckland to see your Excellency, and answer any questions which might be put to him; that he had never taken up arms himself, or advised his people to do so, and that the only reason why he had not joined the ranks of the Queenites was, that he had had personal differences with the principal men of that party. If credit be due anywhere for the decided action taken in this affair, it belongs to the Ngatipikiaos and their companions, who at their own risk and on their own responsibility have made prisoners of these Pai Marire fanatics. The effect cannot, I think, be otherwise than salutary. They will, of course, expect to be rewarded by the Government for their trouble. They are not free from apprehension as D

13

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5

to the possible consequences of their act, and threats have already been uttered. The Tuhourangi have received few if any arms from Government, and are not sufficiently armed. Many of the Ngatipikiaos also are without arms. In order to provide for their own safety, it has been proposed to compel the Natives belonging to the inland settlements on the Makctu river to come out to the coast and bring away their food so as to make it impossible for a hostile party to occupy a position there ; also to deal summarily with the Puhirua people for the same reason, but the Arawa very naturally feel that such measures may result in hostilities, and that the responsibility of adopting them should not be thrown upon their shoulders alone—they are required to place confidence in us, and think it but reasonable that we should trust them, and meet with them the consequences of acts which are sanctioned by us. They are willing to incur risk and responsibility when these are shared with them by us, and I think we have no right to expect more than this. However convenient it may be to use them as a catspaw, it is scarcely to be wondered at if they object to be so used, nor is it generous in us to attempt it. The aspect of affairs on the coast to the Eastward is less threatening. It would appear that the intention of attacking the Arawa had been given up for the present, but recent events may effect a change. I have to apologize for the length of this letter, but I felt anxious that your Excellency should have the Maketu view of the present situation. I have, <fee., His Excellency Sir George Grey, K.C.B. Titos. H. Smith. Enclosure 8 to No. 23. Colonel Greer to His Excellency the Governor. Sir, — Camp, Te Papa, Tauranga, 14th February, 1865. I have the honor to report for your Excellency's information, that, in accordance with your instructions, the Maori prisoners named below embark this evening on board H.M.S. " Esk," for Auckland. With regard to the remainder of the prisoners taken by the Arawas, I directed Major Kirby, commanding at Waikato, (in accordance with the advice of Mr. Clarke, Civil Commissioner,) to hand them over to Mr. Smith, Civil Commissioner, in order that they might be released. I understand Mr. Smith declined to have any tiling to say to them, and the consequence is there has been a hitch, and the Arawas retained them in their pa. I sent Mr. Eice down this morning to bring the prisoners up here. When they arrive, I shall carry out the original arrangement, and let them go with a caution. Mr. Clarke accompanies the prisoners, and will give your Excellency every explanation. I have, &c., H. H. Greer, His Excellency Sir G. Grey, K.C.B. Colonel, commanding Tauranga District.

LIST OF PRISONERS brought from Tauranga, and now on board Her Majesty's Ship "Esk" : —

Note.—Those marked with an asterisk made their submission at Tauranga, and took the Oath of Allegiance. Auckland, 14th February, 1865. Henrt T. Clarke. No. 24. His "Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretaht of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Wellington, Ist April. 1865. In compliance with the request of my Responsible Advisers, I have the honor to transmit . the copy of a Memorandum I have received from them rebutting any impression which might prevail, that the War in New Zealand is now carried on for the profit or gratification of the Colonists, an impression which I am quite satisfied would be an erroneous one. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 25. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir,— " Government House, Wellington, Ist April, 1865. In compliance with the request of my Responsible Advisers I have the honor to transmit a

No. 3G,

■FideA..TSo.l,y.9.

No. 37

Tide A. No. 1 ; pp. 6-9.

14

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

Same. Hapu. Tribe. Hori Kingi Tupaea #Hone Makarauri (M) *Te Peka Te Tauaro Nenia Hipcruri Petira Kingi Tiu Tamihaua Tiu Timoti Ngitanuho Ngatihoko Te Materawaho Ngaitcahi Ngatiranghvcu'C'lii Ngaiterangi Te Arawa j> Not knowu Ngatihaua ji ii

A.—No. 5,

■copy of a Memorandum they have prepared for your information, containing an exposition of the measures which they recommend should be taken for the future defence of the Colony of New Zealand. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. &• Geet. No. 26. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary op State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Wellington, 3rd April, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information a copy of a letter I have received from i Sir D. Cameron, reporting the defeat of a party of rebel Natives by Her Majesty's Forces, in a 1 skirmish which took place on the 13th of March, near the Eiver Patea. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G-. Grey. No. 27. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, "Wellington, 4th April, 1865. My Besponsible Advisers have requested me to forward the enclosed petition from the inhabitants of Hawke's Bay to the Queen, praying that Her Majesty will bo pleased to withhold Her assent from any measure which inaf have for its object the dismemberment of the Colony, or the alteration or suspension of the present constitution of New Zealand. I have, &c, The Eight. Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. Enclosure to No. 27. E. A. Carlyon, Esq., to the Hon. the Colonial Secretary. Sir,— Napier, 3rd March, 1865. I have the honor of transmitting to you a petition from the inhabitants of Hawke's Bay to the Queen, and trust that you will have no objection to present the same to His Excellency the Governor, for the purpose of being forwarded to Her Majesty. I may add that, so far as I am aware, not a dozen settlers of this Province have declined to sign this petition. I have, <fee, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary. E. A. Carlyon. Petition to the Queen's Most Gracious Majesty. The Petition of your Majesty's faithful subjects, inhabitants of the Province of Hawke's Bay, in the Colony of New Zealand, — Humbly sheweth, — That your petitioners emphatically deprecate the exertions which are being made towards the dismemberment of the Colony of New Zealand, by an attempt to obtain the severance of the Province of Auckland from the rest of the Colony under a separate Constitution. That your petitioners are of opinion that any diversion or disintegration of the Colony of New —Zealand would seriously augment the cost of its government; would undermine its credit; would tend materially to impair the peace, order, and good government of the Colony ; and would consequently be highly injurious to its interests. That your petitioners are convinced that it is absolutely essential to the welfare of both races of its inhabitants that New Zealand be preserved as one Colony, whole and undivided, and that any attempt to tamper with its present Constitution would inevitably either prolong the present dissensions or provoke further disturbances among its aboriginal inhabitants, and thus destroy the earnest hope of the Colonists of forming one great and prosperous community destined to become one of the brightest ornaments of the British Crown. Tour petitioners therefore humbly pray that your Majesty will be graciously pleased to withhold your assent to any measure which may have for its object the dismemberment of the present Constitution of New Zealand. (Here follow the signatures.) No. 28. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Wellington, 4th April, 1865. My attention was yesterday called to a statement made by Mr. FitzGerald in a letter to Mr. Adderley, dated the 14th of November last, and by the latter gentlemen inserted in the Times newspaper. 2. The statement is as follows: —That I obtained permission to erect on some land in the Waikato, belonging to a man named Te Wheoro, a school-room and a court-house; that I then had a plan made of a strong bullet-proof redoubt, capable of containing a strong body of troops ; that this waa sent up into the Waikato, but the moment it was commenced, the Natives saw what was meant and took alarm ; that they pulled it down, and threw the timber into the river; and that the effect of such an act of treachery on the Native mind can well be imagined. 3. I beg to state that this allegation as made is wholly and absolutely untrue; and that both Mr. TitzGerald and Mr. Adderley have acted most improperly in giving it currency in England as they have done. Mr. FitzGerald especially has acted most wrongly, as he is a member of the General

No. 39,

Vide A. No. 4, p, 16.

No. 40.

No. 41

15

ZEALAND TO TEE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5.

Assembly, which met in November, a few days after he wrote his letter, when lie could, if lie really desired to elicit the truth, have brought the subjects alluded to in his letter forward, when they could have been fairly met and answered. 4. The enclosures to this Despatch will prove as follows —-Upon the 30th of November, ISGI, it was arranged with my Responsible Advisers, that the Colonial Ministers were to assume the same responsibility in Native Affairs as in all other matters, and that the Governor was in relation to Native Affairs to act under their advice. This arrangement continued in force until August, 1862. During its continuance, my Responsible Advisers, in pursuance of a system established under the authority of Her Majesty's Government, and approved by the General Assembly of New Zealand, enrolled, a Police Force on the Lower Waikato River, in which body of men was included the chief Te Wheoro aud some of his followers. 5. Upon the 30th of April, 18G2, my Responsible Advisers, at the request of this chief Te Wheoro, determined to erect a court-house upon his land. About the 20th May, 1862, the so-called Maori King, who had been making a kind of progress through the Thames District, and had been threatening with penalties any person who might sell land to Europeans in that district, visited with his followers the place of the chief Te Wheoro, and forbade him to build a court-house on his own land, making very serious threats as to the course that would be pursued if he persisted in his intention to do so. G. I beg to explain that the refusal of the so-called Maori King and his adherents to allow the administration of law within a large portion of Her Majesty's possessions in New Zealand was about this time assuming a most formidable character, and must shortly have led to collisions. For instance, about three months after the occurrence now referred to, a young English girl, only thirteen years of age, was seized by a Native on the high road, near the English town of Wanganui. The Native attempted to ravish her. The girl's father heard her screams and came to her assistance, and the Native escaped, but was shortly afterwards arrested on the charge of an assault with intent to ravish, when he was rescued by the adherents of the so-called Maori King, who stated they would not permit a Native to be made amenable to the jurisdiction of our courts for any offence whatever. 7. The real question at this time was this, was our jurisdiction or that of the so-called Maori King to prevail even in the vicinity of our own settlements. 8. It was for this object that they forbade the erection of a court-house at Te Wheoro's village, although that village lay at no great distance from land the property of Europeans. 9. On the 28th of June, 1862, I was advised in the manner then usual, that a barrack for the accommodation of a Native Police Force, should be added to the court-house which was about to be built. 10. Te Wheoro had explained to me the danger in which he was placed by having joined the Government, and having taken office under it. 11. I thought that he ought to be allowed to protect himself from violence in his own village, and that preparations should be made to resist the rebellion which I feared was about to break out, and I therefore acquiesced in the advice tendered to me. The timber necessary to construct a police barrack on Te Wheoro's land was under these circumstances prepared and eventually taken there with the assistance of the chief aud his tribe, and to their great satisfaction, when the adherents of the so-called Maori King, who had declared they would punish him if he persisted in his design, assembled in great numbers, and in spite of the strenuous resistance on the part of Te Wheoro and his people, rafted the timber down the river. 12. Te Wheoro and his tribe have remained our faithful friends to the present time, and have on repeated occasions rendered us the most active and energetic assistance. 13. I beg to add that the other statements in Mr. FitzGerald's letter regarding my proceedings, are quite as untrue as the unfounded charge which I have alluded to in this Despatch. I have, &c, The Right Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 29. His Excellency the Goverxoe to the Right Hon. the Secretary op State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, Wellington, 6th April, 1865. It is with the very greatest concern that I transmit to you the enclosed papers relating to the murder of the Rev. Mr. Volkner, at Opotiki, on the 2nd of March last. 2. Mr. Volkner was murdered by hanging close to his own church; his murder was attended by circumstances of deliberate and shocking barbarity. 3. From the letter written by Mr. White, enclosed in this Despatch, it will be seen that Kereopa, the person chiefly concerned in this murder and the atrocities which attended it, started with his companions from Warea, near Taranaki, with the baked head of an European soldier, for the East Coast. 4. In the afternoon of the night (the 14th March,) in which I heard of the murder, I learnt at Wanganui—to my horror—that this head had been passed on through the Upper Wanganui District with the assent of one of the leading chiefs there, for the purpose of rousing the East Coast Natives, against the European population. 5. I cannot communicate to you this most distressing information without adding that Mr. Yolkner was one of the most amiable, devoted, and gentle missionaries that I have ever met with. I have, &c., The Right Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 30. Sib,— Government House, Wellington, 6th April, 1865. In my Despatch No. 42, of this day's date, I stated that at Wanganui, upon the afternoon

Tide E. No. 1., 1865 Let. No. 5, p. 5. Let. No. 4, p. 5. Let. No. 7, p. 5. Let. No. 11, p. 6. Let. No. 9, p. 6.

Vide E. No. 1. Let. No. 13, pp. 7 mid 8.

No. 42.

Not printed.

No. 45.

16

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OP NEW

A.—No. I

of the 14th March, I had ascertained to ray horror that the baked head of an English soldier had been sent on from Pipiriki, on the Upper Wanganui, to Turanga, for the purpose of rousing the East Coast Natives to murder Europeans in that part of New Zealand. 2. The two principal chiefs of Pipiriki arc Topia and Tahana. Immediately after this information had been communicated to me by the chief Pohi, his son Topia arrived at Wanganui, having been sent for to make his submission, he having previously come down the Wanganui Eiver to within about ten miles of the town of Wanganui. The friendly chiefs who had defeated Pchi and his tribe had entered into a convention with them to the effect that if they at once gave in their submission they would guarantee them a full pardon from the Government. Our friendly chiefs had concluded the convention without having any knowledge that Topia and Tahana, who had been brought up and had lived for years amongst the Europeans with whom they had never had any cause of quarrel, had rendered themselves partners in such a crime as sending on the head of an European soldier with such an object. 3. In the course of the same night I was roused to receive the intelligence of the shocking murder of Mr. Yolkner on the East Coast of this island by the parties who had taken on this head. 4. I therefore the next day on seeing Topia, on his refusing to make his submission, felt myself justified in only undertaking to carry out the conditional promise of a pardon which had been made to him by the friendly Natives, if he fulfilled those conditions in the course of the day, which he declined to do. 5. I therefore allowed him to depart and allowed him twenty-four hours to escape in, and then issued a Proclamation calling upon all persons to aid in his apprehension. 6. I have the honor to transmit for your information a note drawn up by the Interpreter of what passed on this occasion, as also a copy of a report made by Mr. Booth of the result of his proceeding* with Topia's people, to whom I despatched him, requiring them at once to come and make their submission, which twenty-four of their leading men immediately did. I have, &c., The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. Enclosure 1 to No. 30. NOTES of Interview between His Excellency Sir Geoege Gket and Topia Tueoa, at Putiki, Wanganui, 15th March, ISGS. Topia said that he had nothing to say. He had no desire to come from Eaeriki to see the ■Governor. He was here because he was sent for by the Governor. The Governor replied that he sent for him to come and take the oath of allegiance, and asked him if ho would do so. He replied, No. The Governor then said, Listen to my words (which were read by Mr. Fulloon) : —Topia, who is one of the principal chiefs of Pipiriki and of the Wanganui Eiver, has acted as priest for the Hau Hau fanatics; he allowed Mr. Hewitt's head to be brought to Pipiriki, as it was being carried to the East Coast by the party of the Hau Hau people, who took it there to raise the East Coast tribes to war, and who have committed such a dreadful murder on Mr. Volkner. In my belief it is the duty of a chief to give an example to his people, and not to follow their advice. Topia gave them an example in doing that which has led to so great a crime, when he acted as their priest and leader in the Hau Hau superstition. I believe from his having done so, and from his having allowed Mr. Hewitt's head to be brought to Pipiriki, and to be carried thence towards Turanga, where he knew they were taking it, and with what object, he is in a great degree responsible for Mr. Hewitt's and for Mr" Yolkner's murder. I did not know these things when I heard that Hori Kingi, Mete Kingi, and others had allowed him to come into the Lower Wanganui district. Now that so dreadful 4i crime has been committed as the murder of Mr. Volkner at Opotiki, it was quite time we should know at once our friends from our enemies. Hori Kingi, Mete Kingi, and other chiefs, having made promises to Topia, I shall feel bound to fulfil those promises, and to pardon him in the same manner as Pehi, if he at once takes the oath of allegiance. If lie does not do this, and declines to give an example of good to his people, but makes an excuse that he must first return up the river to consult them, I shall regard him as a person implicated in the murder of Mr. Hewitt and Mr. Volkner. He may return up the river to-day ; to-morrow I will issue a notice offering a large reward for hia apprehension, and he shall be tried for murder whenever he is caught. Topia: I speak. You say that lam implicated in the murders of Mr. Hewitt and Mr. Volkner. It is correct, I am implicated (uru) in these murders, and also in the work of the Hau Hau. The work was theirs and I joined in (I uru au), and I was implicated, because I belonged to the Hau Hau. It was agreed by the people that Pehi should come to you and make peace, not me. The Governor then asked Mete Kingi if they knew that Mr. Hewitt's head had been at Pipiriki or not when they made peace with them. Mete Kingi, Hori Kingi, and several others answered, No. Topia : The head had passed on when Hewitt was killed. It was another head. The Governor said it does not matter whose head it was, the crime was the same. He believed it Hewitt's, for he was told it was on very good authority. Mete Kingi: He says that he will not take the oath of allegiance, that Pehi was the only one that was arranged to do so, and that he (Topia) also did not come down here of his own accord; he came voluntarily to Eaorihia, and then to Kai Waiki; he was not asked to do so. The chiefs who consented to take the oath were Pehi, Topia, Te Tahana, Tamati Waka, and Hori Patene. Tipene, Wi Pakau, .and Eepata were by at the time; they did not give any pledges, but the others did give pledges ; these very things that we gave you they gave us to give to you. lam looking at his words (not coming of his own accord), and of what was said by his elders (tupunas). In my mind he cannot go against what Pehi has done. The Governor says that Topia can go to-day and pursue him by the notice to-morrow. Would you not let Hori Kingi and myself have the management. Topia: Mete has communicated the names of the chiefs who made peace. It is correct; but I made peace only with Hori Kingi and his people, not with you. Because I made peace with Hori Kingi and his people, it does not follow that I was to make peace with you. I did not promise to live in peace with you I did not give my pledge to you. I fought against Hori Kingi; my quarrel war: with him, and good words are now between us ; but with you I have made no peace. I did not E

Enclosed

17

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5.

come here to make peace ; you sent for me that we might speak to each other. I quite agree to what you say about sending the notice (of reward) after me to-morrow. You have heard the words that 1 have spoken. If you choose to arrest me now you can. I am willing to be arrested without offering resistance. Do not think to frighten me into taking the oath of allegiance by threats. I will not lake the oath of allegiance. The Governor said: He had better go at once, he would not have any further intercourse with him —with a man that had murdered his countrymen, and was implicated in such horrid crimes as Iho murder of the Bey. Mr. Volkner, who was a good missionary; they hanged him near his own church, and in the presence of his own congregation ; they ate some parts of his body. He was sure the chiefs of Putiki would not countenance such a man. Depart immediately. Topia then left. After a little while Hori Kingi came back to say that Topia had spoken to the effect that he would go up to Pipiriki and consult Te Tahana, and would then come down the river, with all his people, and take the oath, for he was anxious to come here. He would not suppress what Pehi had done. The Governor: He did not wish to frighten him into taking the oath. Ho only agreed to allow him to take the oath out of consideration for the promise made by Hori Kingi. He would give this day for the fulfilment of those promises ; but to-morrow I will give £1000 reward for his apprehension, and. if caught, he will be tried. The Governor believes that he will yet be caught and tried, and if convicted very likely hung. It is a great crime that he has committed in allowing the head of ]\I r. Hewitt to be received at Pipiriki, and then to bo taken towards Turanga, for the purpose of raising the Xativcs to war. Those very men carrying that head had murdered a good missionary, the Eev. Mr. Volkner ; they hung him near his own church; they cut off' his head, and ate his eyes ; they ate his brains and heart, and gave his body to the dogs. This work began and went from Vanganui —from Topia, the priest of Ilau Haus, a man that has been brought up from his childhood amongst the Europeans, who has been kindly treated by them, and was never injured by them in any way. He will surely be punished. I shall never pardon him. He will yet be tried for these murders. I will offer £1000 reward to-morrow for his apprehension, which will stand good until he is caught. If the Europeans heard that Topia was here and what he has done, I think that they will not'let him get away. A chief ought to bo an example to his people, and when he commits a crime he should be brought to justice and punished. In his (the Governor's) opinion he (Topia) should take the oath of allegiance to-day, and then go and consult his people, and bring them down with him. If they did not come, he might return alone. It was in this way alone that he could atone for the offences that he had committed. James Fulloon, Interpreter. Enclosure 2 to No. 30. J. Booth, Esq., to His Excellency the GovEKyoa. Sic,— I have the honor to report to your Excellency that on arriving at Eanana on the night of Friday, the 17th instant, lat once forwarded a letter to Pipiriki. The following is a translation: — Eanana, 18th March, 1865, 12.30 a.m. To Tahana Turoa. to Hori Patcne, to Te Mokena, to Ihaia, to Kereopa, and to all the men at Pipiriki. To Tamati Waka of Manganui-o-te-ao, and to his people, to Kopato te Korohiti of Utapu, and to his people. Friends, —This is the Governor's word to you. You are to come down the river, and he will confirm the peace which was made by Hori Kingi and Mete Kingi with Pchi Turoa, and with all of you at Ohoutahi and at Pipiriki. This is to tell all of you who are at Pipiriki and at Ohincmutu to come and meet me to-day at Hiruharama, and we will talk this matter over. Pehi will be there with me. The reason why the Governor wishes you to come down at once is because of the dreadful crimes which have been committed by the Hau Hau fanatics. The head which was taken by Kereopa reached Opotiki. The Minister, Mr. Volkner, has been murdered, and his eyes, brains, and heart have been devoured by the Hau Hans. The Eev. Mr. Grace is also a prisoner in the hands of these murderers. The Governor says that the time has now come when he must know his friends from his foes. The Governor has made peace with Pehi, they are now friends ; but the words of Topia have not been straight and open like those of Pehi. and the Governor's thoughts about Topia arc dark. The Governor's word to you is this, if you wish to make peace with him on this day, or at this time, he will make peace with you, and his thoughts will be light. Your friends who were taken prisoners in the fight at Moutoa are on their way back, the Eanga is their canoe. When this letter reaches you make haste and come the same hour. From me, J. Booth. From Mete Kixgi. The letter of which the above is a translation was sent to Pipiriki by five Native policemen ; they arrived at Pipiriki at daybreak on Saturday morning. After the letter was read several of the principal men (about ten) said in answer, that they would not go to make peace with the Governor, that they had never intended to make peace with the Governor, and that the pledges were only pledges of peace between themselves and Hori Kingi; that it was a Maori quarrel, and the peace was between Maoris only. Tahana, who was then at Ohinemutu, was then sent for. When lie arrived, he severely blamed the men who had before spoken for the course they had taken; he said "you Ihaia te Mokena and Tamati "Waka sent those presents to serve as stepping stones across the river of difficulty and trouble to the favor of the Governor, and now you are trying to go back from that word." They then made answer that Te Aropeta has asked them for the things as a gift to Hori Kingi.

18

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OE NEW

A.—No

About noon, Tahana, and Te Mokcna came down to Oliouta'.ii, whore tiiej' stayed for two hours to talk with Pehi and Topia. About 2 p.m., they came to Hiruharama. Te Kepa fir.it spoke ;ho told Tahana why wo had come up, repeating in substance the words contained in my letter, but added that the reason why they were required to decide on going down at once was because of the obstinacy of Topia, who had said openly that he had, through his influence as chief and priest of the Hau Haus, consented to the murder of Mr. Volkner, and had also refused to make any terms with your Excellency. He was proscribed in consequence, and a price would be put upon his head. He then asked Tahana if he was willing to go to tow m and to take the oath of allegiance, to which Tahana replied —"I have already told you at Pipiriki that I am ashamed to go back to the Pakchas because I had no sufficient reason for leaving the Governor and coming over to this side; I was always well treated by the Governor, and without any reason I left him; that is why I am ashamed to go back. My word to Pehi when ho wont to town was —if the Governor says you are to go to "Wellington, or Auckland, or elsewhere, —go; and if Topia had been taken as he went down the river of his own accord, I should have said it was quite right. You have heard the answer of the Pipiriki people; I have blamed them because they have broken their word. I sent no pledge because my way is not clear yet." Mete Kingi asked Tahana if he could not send a message to your Excellency to say that they would think over your message and perhaps come down in a week or two. Tahana said—"No, we shall not see our way any clearer then than wo do now." I then spoke. I went over what I had said in the letter, enlarging more fully on the enormity of a religion which could countenance such awful crimes as they had been guilty of committing; that this horrid religion had been introduced into the Wanganui by bringing the head of a murdered man; when they embraced that religion, they turned their hand against me —a man who had been living under their protection, and entirely for their benefit. More horrible crimes had since been committed w Tith tho knowledge and consent of all who had joined this system of iniquity. The Governor was willing to give them a last chance, and to make peace, if they came at once ; but now, after having heard of the dreadful crime committed on Mr. Volkner, if they still refused this offer of mercy, they would all be looked on as murderers. I then said, " Tahana, are you willing to go with me to town, and to take oath of allegiance ?" He answered, " I have already stated why I cannot go at present." I said, " I must have a decided answer ; the Governor is now determined to know his friends from his foes." He then said, " I will not go." Then I said, " You will risk the consequence of this refusal ?"—" I will." To Mokena then stood up : " I will not go to town ; I will not make peace with the Governor ; I sent a present, but it was for Hori Kingi; I will not take the oath of allegiance." AVhilst waiting at Hiruharama for the arrival of Tahana, Mete Kingi and myself were talking with a man named Haimona, from Taupo. I expressed my fears about the safety of Mr. Grace. He said, "If Mr. Grace gets near Taupo, he will not be killed. Te Heuheu has had a runauga with his people. He has told them that Mr. Grace is to be plundered of his property ; all his sheep, cattle, house propertj-, &c, are to be divided amongst the natives ; he is to be taken prisoner, but his life is tobe spared." In speaking about Mr. Volkner, ho said, " Karewera, (Garavel), a Eoman Catholic priest, was a Kingite ; he was doing the King's work. Ho has been put to death ; that is why Mr. Volkner was murdered. The men who took the oath of allegiance when Pehi did have gone back to the Hau Hau religion, with the exception of Pehi, himself, Hohaia, and one or two others. They say they intend to live quietly, but to keep up that religion." I have, &c., His Excellency Sir G. Grey, K.C.B. James Booth. No. 31. His Excellency the Governor to tho Eight Hon. the Secbetaky of State for the Colonies. Sir,— Government House, AVellington, 7th April, 1865. I have thought it better in reference to my Despatch No. 41, of the ith instant, to give you the means of at any time answering all the important statements made in Mr. KtzGerald's letter to Mr. Adderley, of the 11th November, 1564. 2. Firstly, Mr. FitzGerald states, " I will now state one fact more the most important I think of all :— " After the taking of Eangiriri, the Natives sent to sue for peace, the Governor replied that the General must go on uninterrupted to Ngaruawahia, the Maori King's palace, and then he would treat with them. The Natives replied that the General should go there, and then they would treat. They immediately withdrew all their forces to the southward of Ngaruawahia, and our army went up and occupied it without opposition, passing a defile which might have been readily defended so as to cause us great trouble and loss. " Notwithstanding that the solemn faith of the Governor had been pledged that negociations should be opened for peace, no communication if any kind whatever was made to the Natives. The army continued to advance, and the Natives to fight with the courage of despair. It is tho opinion of many in this country, that just as favourable terms of peace could have been obtained after Eangiriri, as will even now ever be made after all the subsequent and as we believe unnecessary slaughter. You will find the evidence of these facts in the sessional papers of 1863. The letter of Penc Pukewhau and the Governor's reply will be found in E. No. sd, pp. 6, 7, 8." 3. I have already addressed you on this subject in my Despatch No. 174, of the 30th November last, but I wish to add that every one of the important statements in this paragraph of Mr. FitzGerald's letter, are wholly and absolutely untrue. I wrote to Te Pukewhau from Auckland, on the 6th December, to say that the General must go on to Ngaruawahia, the capital of the Maori King, and the

No. 46.

19

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OE STATE.

...—No. 5

Queen's flag must be hoisted there, before I treated with the Natives. The General took possession of Ngaruawahia upon the Bth of December. Te Pukewhau did not receive my letter until the 9th of December. The Natives did not therefore reply to me that the General should go to Ngaruawahia, and did not immediately withdraw all their forces to the southward of that place in consequence of my letter, for they knew nothing of it until the General had taken Ngaruawahia, the fact is they were in full retreat before the General when I wrote it. 4. On the 16th December, I wrote again to the Natives, and Te Pukewhau having died before that date, the letter was delivered to his brother. In that letter I told the Natives, the General having reached Ngaruawahia, that I would receive a deputation from them, and treat with them. It is therefore not true that no communication of any kind whatever was made to the Natives, as Mr. FitzGerald asserts. The papers enclosed in my Despatch of the 30th of November last will prove what I have here alleged. 5. Again, Mr. FitzGerald states " Sir George Grey repeatedly promised that the affair of the Waitara purchase should be inquired into, and justice should be done, yet for eighteen long months he made no inquiry, and took no steps whatever in the matter." I can only say that this is quite untrue ; from the moment of my arrival in the Colony, I did my best in every way to get the Natives to agree to an inquiry into the justice of the Waitara ease, but no persuasion on my part or that of others could induce them to agree to such an inquiry. The writings of Mr. Gorst, and the Bishop of New Zealand, and of Mr. Fox, will be found to confirm what I say on this subject. 6. With regard to Mr. FitzGerald's statements as to my having taken possession of the Tataraimaka Block, I can only say it is true I did that, and that I should do the same thing again. The Tataraimaka Block had been by us fairly purchased from the Natives many years before. The validity of the purchase had never been called in question. It was only twelve miles distant from the town of New Plymouth, was only a few thousand acres in extent, had been nearly all in a high state of cultivation, had houses, a church, and places which had been the happy homes of families for years on it. Those people had all been driven away, their houses and crops absolutely destroyed, and their sheep and cattle all carried off by the Taranaki and Ngatiruanui tribes, to whom we had never done any wrong, who had murdered some of the settlers, and who, as Mr. FitzGerald says, claimed to have conquered it from the English. 7. To have let them retain possession of such a conquest so made, was I found to encourage our enemies, to depress and alarm our Native friends, and to set race against race. I therefore thought it my duty, as soon as I could, to go and again take possession of our own lawful property. And I feel quite certain my doing so had a most beneficial effect on both races throughout these Islands. Mr. FitzGerald.does not understand the English character, when he/thinks they will sit quietly down and see other people in possession of their homes and lands which these people to use Mr. FitzGerald's words, claimed because they had conquered them from the English. 8. Nor does Mr. FitzGerald understand barbarous men. To have admitted that a chosen spot, twelve miles from the town of New Plymouth, had been conquered from the English, would have terrified the wavering and prevented allies from risking their territories by helping a people that could not hoid their own ; and would have encouraged barbarians to attempt the conquest of new homesteads; the capture of more booty. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. &c, &c. G. Ghet. Xo. 32. His Excellency the Goveenok to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaby of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Wellington, 7th April, 1865. Adverting to my Despatches Nos. 42 and 45, of the 6th instant, in which I alluded in part to information which had been given to me at Wanganui on the 14th of March, I beg to state that the intelligence imparted amounted to this : — 2. That on a previous occasion the head of a British Officer, Captain Lloyd, had been brought from Taranaki to Pipiriki; that it had been placed upon a pole ; that the population of the place had been induced to dance round it until roused to frenzy, when they rushed it, bit it, and treated it with every indignity. 3. The two principal chiefs at Pipiriki were absent when this took place, aiding the Waikato tribe against us. On their return, they expressed no disapproval of what had been done. On the contrary, Topia, one of these men who had lived from youth much with Europeans, placed himself at the hc^d of the fanatics, and became their priest. 4. Subsequently another baked head of an English soldier, who had been killed near New Plymouth, had been sent from Warea to Pipiriki, and thence, with the knowledge of the chief of that place, to Tauranga, for the purpose of rousing the East Coast tribes to deeds of violence. 5. The most material parts of this information were given to me by Pehi, on the afternoon of the 14th of March. On the night which followed came the news of the horrid murder of Mr. Yolkuer on the East Coast. Pehi, who was to have met me the next day, was so alarmed at this intelligence that he ran away at dawn the next morning, and got off to the Upper Wanganui. He did this with no intention of deserting us, but dreading some temporary outbreak of violence on the part of the European population when such shocking news was received. 6. Pipiriki is situated about eighty miles up the Wanganui Eiver ; from thence branch off the roads to the East Coast, to Taupo, to the Eangitikei, and to Taranaki and the Ngatiruanui country. It was the place through which the murderers must return to reach Warea, and it was the last spot from which they had proceeded in this part of the country to execute their purpose ; it was also the place at which the baked head of a British Officer had been exhibited in so revolting a manner by people who fully knew how great a crime they were committing. 7. All these circumstances made me conclude that Pipiriki ought to be forthwith taken possession of and occupied by us. ,

No. 47,

20

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No 5.

8. To do this was a service of difficulty and danger, from the remoteness of the place, the rapids in the river, the want of any means of ascending it but by canoes, and the small force that could be collected. 9. Two hundred men of the Military Settlers being however available, and a body of friendly Natives having joined them, an expedition under Major Atkinson, the Minister for Colonial Defence, proceeded up the river on Friday, the 39th March ; and on Monday, the third instant, they occupied Pipiriki, which is now in our possession. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G-. Gbet. No. 33. His Excellency the Goveknoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Coloxies. Sir, — Government House, "Wellington, Bth April, 1865. My Eesponsible Advisers have requested me to transmit the enclosed Memorandum in which they place before you the present financial position of the Colony of New Zealand, and the line of policy which they propose to pursue. I may in a few words state what is the result which may be. gathered from this Memorandum. 2. The Colony of New Zealand proposes for the future to dispense with all military assistance from Great Britain, and in all other respects to rely upon its own energies and resources. One of the results which the Colony hopes to obtain from this policy is the relief of the mother country from that large annual expenditure which has hitherto entailed so considerable a sacrifice on the British taxpayer, which sacrifice the Colony recognizes with gratitude. 3. In pursuance of this policy, and in order to make provision for its debt to the Imperial Government, the Colonial Government has transferred to the Imperial Treasury £500,000 in Debentures, bearing interest at the rate of 4 per cent., and it will continue to meet the interest and sinking fund on account of these Debentures as provided for in the Act of 1863. 4. It has also made a considerable increase in the taxation of the country by raising the Customs Tariff to the extreme limit which the Colonial Ministers think practicable. It has also under consideration a plan for the imposition of direct taxation, and has made and is continuing to make all possible reduction in the expenditure. 5. You will find by the statements made by the Colonial Ministers, that they undertake these responsibilities from a sense of duty, but with serious apprehensions as to the difficulties which may possibly fall upon the Colony, from the magnitude of the liabilities it is about to incur, and they submit that at such a time the Colony has a reasonable and just claim upon the mother country for some pecuniary aid towards enabling it to bear the heavy responsibilities it is about to undertake, and that they trust therefore that the Home Government will extend its aid to the Colony, either by covering the remainder of the Three Million Loan by the Imperial guarantee, or by making to the Colony an annual grant-in-aid of the extraordinary expenditure for the next four or five years. 6^ Upon this subject I beg to report, that the Colony has already raised, without the Imperial guarantee, one million of its Three Million Loan; the amount therefore they ask to be covered by the Imperial guarantee is two millions, instead of one million, as recently authorized by Act of Parliament. 7. My own opinion is, that to place the Colony in a position of security and prosperity, an additional million would be required in excess of the amount stated by my Eesponsible Advisers, and that if the intention is to give the Colony such a substantial assistance as will secure beyond doubt its future welfare, then the Imperial Government should cover by its guarantee a 4 per cent, loan for three millions instead of for two millions. 8. In giving this guarantee, Great Britain would incur no risk, and would get rid of a very large annual expenditure at no cost to itself. At the same time it would confer a great boon on this Colony, and 1 think it will be generally admitted that New Zealand in now so cheerfully taking upon itself such large responsibilities, in pursuance of a line of policy which the Homo Government wishes to see adopted, has really established large claims upon the consideration of Great Britain, and that it seems a sound and generous policy not wholly to abandon a people involved in such difficulties as Her Majesty's subjects in New Zealand are, but rather to afford them an aid, which whilst it will cost nothing, may determine the question as to whether a large number of British subjects and their descendants are for many years to come to live in safety and comfort and on good terms with the Natives, or are, on the other hand, to be involved in constant wars, sufferings, and privations, whilst the Xative race will probably melt away before them. I have, &c., The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell" M.P. G. Gbet. No. 34. His Excellency the Goyektor to the Eight Hon. the Secbetaey of State for the Colonies. Sin, — Government House, Auckland, 27th April, 1865. I have received from Sir D. Cameron a letter dated the 9th instant, in which he informs me that he has transmitted to Earl de Grey a correspondence which contains serious accusations against myself and the Colonial Ministers ; I therefore enclose copies of this correspondence for your information, and I beg at the same time to place you in possession of my replies. 2. On the subject of the complaint of my not having on any occasions previous to the 16th of December last issued definite instructions to Sir D. Cameron, I can only say that my desire has been, to leave him as free and unembarrassed as possible. If from my wish to attain this end I have fallen into an error in the contrary direction, I regret it. Had I on any occasion been asked for definite instructions, I would in so far as I thought it consistent with my duty, have given them. But in niy F

No. 49. Vide A.y0.1,p.5

No. 53. Vide A. No. 4. Sir G-. Grey to Sir D. Cameron, 16th December, 1864. Ditto to ditto, 6th January, 1865: and copies of all correspondence between Sir GK Grey and Sir D. Cameron from 6th January to Ist May, 1865 : except enclosures to No. 54, 27th April, 1865.

21

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No 5.

opinion the instructions I gave were adequate and fitting for the occasions and circumstances they were designed to meet. 3. With regard to the instructions which I issued on the lGtli December, 1864, having been unfortunately issued without my having any knowledge of the nature of the country, the strength and position of the rebels, &c\, and that therefore they were liable to bo found inapplicable, I beg to say that they have not been found inapplicable, and that although I had never walked over that particular tract of country, I had had many and accurate descriptions of it from most intelligent people who knew it well, and that with the additional knowledge which has since been gained regarding it, I see nothing which I would alter or modify in my instructions of the 16th of December, had I now the power to do so. I desire that they should stand as they are, and I take the full responsibility of them. 4. On the subject of the war being carried on for the profit and gratification of the Colonists, and Sir D. Cameron being astonished at my employing troops in carrying on aggressive operations in the country between Taranaki and Wanganui, I would observe that I can see no just or reasonable grounds for this astonishment on the part of the General. To Sir D. Cameron, to the British Government, to the Colonial Government, to the Native race, I have repeatedly stated that after the Waikato tribes had been reduced, the safety of the Southern settlements in New Zealand required that the tribes between Taranaki and Wanganui, who were amongst the most guilty of all the tribes in New Zealand, and that in a great measure without cause, should be also reduced to submission. From this determination I have never swerved —that it was a necessary one recent events have shewn. In the month of May, 1861, the fanatical sect of Pai Marires, which was originated for political and aggressive objects in the country I am alluding to, determined to destrojr the peaceful and unoffending settlement of Wanganui; they were descending the river of that name for the purpose of attempting this object,, when they were met on the lMh May, 1864, and defeated by the friendly Natives, and so far were they from relinquishing their designs against the European settlers, that on the 6th of January, 1865 r before Sir D. Cameron had quitted Auckland to engage in the present campaign, Kereopa, Patara, and their murderous followers left Warea with the head of a soldier, on their way from the Taranaki country to the East Coast, to convert other tribes to their superstition, and try to bring about the destruction of the European race. Sir D. Cameron's own letters will also shew, that for some months he had acquiesced in the necessity of making preparations for this campaign, and his descriptions of the disposition and energy of the tribes living within twenty miles of the small European town of Wanganui, will shew that it could never have been safe until they were reduced to submission. 5. With regard to what is really an unfeeling observation—that I am as much disappointed as the rebel Natives that they have not had an opportunity of inflicting loss upon us, at little or no risk to themselves, and that the question of how many British officers and soldiers we may lose is a point which never sufficiently enters into my calculations—l can only say that for more than twenty years I have had to take care for the safety of various parts of Her Majesty's possessions, often under circumstances of considerable danger, and with inadequate means; under the blessing of Providence, and by the ability and valour of the officers and men of Her Majesty's Military and Naval forces, British and Colonial, such parts of the Queen's possessions have always been preserved intact and in safety. I feel sure that it would be found that the loss of life on our side on all the occasions I allude to has been very small. This is certain, that such an accusation as is now made has never before been alleged against me. Unfortunately, recently in one or two instances in New Zealand, our loss has been very large, although on other occasions very considerable results have been gained here with a very trifling loss. In those instances in which so large a loss of life has taken place, I fearlessly challenge inquiry as to whether I am in any way to blame for what took place. 6. In reference to certain places in this country which it is complained that I thought should have been attacked, I need not enter into details on these past events, nor explain the period of time or the manner in which 1 think such operations could have been safely and successfully undertaken, if this had been rapidly done. I need only say, that any operations I should have advocated would have been of a regular kind, which, with due precautions and our powerful artillery, could, I believe, have been accomplished with little loss, against a people having no artillery, and often but indifferent firearms, and that I should have undertaken them, because I believe it is difficult to suppress a rebellion by passing strong places containing large bodies of rebels in arms, and falling on villages ; for by so doing you allow the rebels to disperse and gain new adherents amongst an embittered population, who are too liable to attribute our avoidance of their strong places to wrong causes, and so far am I from being reckless of the lives of British officers and soldiers as such, that if no troops had been here, I should have unhesitatingly directed that Her Majesty's subjects in this country should, under the command of their own officers, have undertaken these operations. I feel sure that they would have cheerfully and resolutely done so, and that they would have brought them to a speedy and successful termination; as lam also satisfied Her Majesty's regular forces would have done. If Sir D. Cameron means that I interfered improperly to try to force him into hazardous operations, I must deny that I did so, and the correspondence transmitted contains abundant proof that such was not the case. 7. I trust that the remarks made by Sir D. Cameron regarding Mr. Mantell will not prejudice any person against that gentleman. I have known him for many years, and believe that he has been most unjustly and unnecessarily attacked, and that no person would, more deeply feel a loss of British officers and soldiers than he would. S. Sir D. Cameron not having informed me which are the letters of which he has sent home copies, I have thought it better to put up the entire correspondence. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Gbet. No. 35. His Excellency the Goyebxoe to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Coloxies. Sir, — Government House, Auckland, 27th April, 1865. Adverting to the correspondence which Sir D. Cameron has transmitted to the Secretary of

No. 4.

22

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No 5.

State for War, relating to the recent operations in the southern part of this Island, 1 have the honor to transmit copies of the letters noted in the margin in regard to the applications the General haa made to me to apply for further reinforcements from England. 2. Upon the 30th of January Sir D. Cameron informed mo that the then recent engagements with the rebels near Nukumaru had shewn that they had concentrated a large force and were likely to offer the most determined resistance to his advance through a difficult country. On the whole, the General recommended that I should apply by the first opportunity for a reinforcement of at least two thousand men, and for a still larger reinforcement, if in addition to the occupation of the country between "Wanganui and the Patea, the road between Taranaki and Wanganui was to be opened, and more land to be confiscated and occupied north of the Waitara, as the General understood to be the plan of the Colonial Government as approved by me. 3. "With this recommendation I did not feel it to be my duty to comply. I thought that the idea that the rebels had, or indeed could, concentrate a large force and offer the most determined resistance to our advance through a difficult country, had originated in a momentary alarm, in which I i ought not to participate. 4. That I was right in that conclusion, in as far as the country between the Wanganui and Patea ! is concerned, is shewn by the General having reached the Patea without having even seen a Native after he left Nukumaru; that I was equally right in as far as the country beyond the Patea is concerned, is shewn by the fact of the General having, up to the furthest point to which he advanced in that direction, only encountered one party of rebels, variously estimated at from two hundred to one hundred and forty strong. lam further borne out in the accuracy of the conclusion at which I arrived regarding the country between the Patea and Taranaki by Colonel Warrc, who commands at the latter place, and who has the best means of procuring information regarding the strength of the Natives, | &c, and who knows the country well for nearly half the distance, having requested to be allowed to march from thence with a force of six hundred men to meet the General on the Patea Eiver. 5. Again on the 11th of February, Sir D. Cameron wrote to me from the Waitotara, informing me ! that there was no person of authority there to represent the Government, and he recommended that myself and some Member of the Government should repair there as quickly as possible, to make ourselves acquainted with the state of affairs, and to judge whether my instructions could be carried: out consistently with the safety of the settlement, or whether they were to be carried out at any risk. ' G. On receiving this recommendation, I was satisfied that I was well acquainted with the state of affairs at "Wanganui, of which country I had a perfect knowledge, and that to stop short in operations which I had advisedly determined should be undertaken, would probably raise at once a large portion of the Native population against us ; and instead of securing the safety of Wanganui, would imperil its position, and that of other parts of New Zealand. I therefore contented myself by sending to the General the reinforcements of regular and colonial forces from this part of the country for which he asked, and adhered to my own views, which I had deliberately formed ; and I feel sure it will be admitted that the result has shewn that I acted wisely and prudently in so doing. All my experience has shewn me that nothing is more necessary in civil wars or rebellions,than not to undertake anything, all the consequences of which you have not previously well considered ; but having once entered upon an operation, to be prepared to encounter every risk in carrying it through. 7. Again, on the Bth of March, Sir D. Cameron wrote to me, strongly advising me to apply for a reinforcement of at least 2000 men from England, as I might depend upon it that my plan of occupying the whole line of coast between the Patea and Taranaki could not, for the reasons given by the General, be carried out without these reinforcements. My letter to Sir D. Cameron, of the 13th of March, contains my reasons for not complying with this renewed application. Those reasons were at the time quite satisfactory to my own mind—they are still so —in fact, recent events have only confirmed me in them. It is due, however, to the General to say, that the impression mj arguments produced on his mind are stated as follows in his answer to me of the loth of March : —" All the reasons you mention for not deciding to apply for reinforcements are to my mind the strongest reasons why they should be applied for." 8. It will be for Her Majesty's Government, with the correspondence before them, to decide what should be done on this point. My own opinion is, that reinforcements were not, and are not necessary. 9. Upon the Ist of February, the General had under his command in the Wanganui District a regular force of 2,950 men and officers in all; and at Taranaki, 1,541 men and officers, making a total regular force of 4,497 men and officers. I believe the number of men from Ihe Waikato regiments employed at the same time in the Transport Corps was about GOO men, and that the number of Military Settlers at Taranaki available for service was about 800 men. Since the Ist of February, 80 irregular Cavalry and 100 Bushrangers have been raised for service in the same district, making a total European force of about G,OOO men. There are also the Taranaki and Wanganui Militia, and a considerable number of friendly Natives, who could be relied on. 10. The strength in which the rebel Natives have met iis in the same district is shewn in the correspondence which has been forwarded to you. The estimate of the resident Native inhabitants of the country between Wanganui and Taranaki is 1,500 in all —men, women, and children —and I am informed by Mr. J. White, the Eesident Magistrate, on what he considers to be accurate information, that the number of men in the Weraroa Pa is now about two hundred and thirty-three. The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. I have, &c, G. Gret. No. 36. His Excellency the Goveenob to the Eight Hon. the Secbetaet of State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, Auckland, 27th April, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information a copy of the Eeverend Mr. Grace's journal of his imprisonment at Opotiki, where Mr. Volkner was murdered. lam sure you will peruse this journal with great interest. I have, Ac, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Ghet.

Vide A. No. 4. Sir D. Cameron to Sir G. Grey, sth January, 18G5. I) i tto to ditto 301 h January, 1805. Sir G. GreytoSh D. Cameron, 6th I'Vlinian . Sir D. Cameron to Sir G. Grey, 11th February. Sir G. Grey to Sir D. Cameron, 16th February. Sir D. Cameron to Sir G. Grey, 17th February. Ditto to ditto, Bth March. Ditto to ditto, 12th March. Sir (1. Grey to Sir D. Cameron, 13th March. .Sir I). Cameron t<. Sir G. Grey, 14th March. Ditto to ditto, 15th March. Ditto to dltto73rd April. Sir G. Grey to Sir D. Cameron, 24th April.

No. 55. Enclosed.

23

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETAEY OP STATE.

i..—No. 5,

Enclosure to Xo. 30. Mn. Grace's Imprisoxmext at Opotiki. Before leaving Auckland for Opotiki and on the passage, Mr Yolkner frequently expressed his confidence in the Opotiki Natives. He was rather sorry that Mrs. Yolkner was not with him; and fully intended her to follow by the next trip of the vessel. We arrived off the Opotiki River at about half-past nine p.m. A prophecy, as we afterwards learned had been put forth, that a vessel full of goods would come up the river, and be followed by one of gunpowder. March Ist.—lmmediately on crossing the bar, I observed at a distance a very large body of Natives assembled on the side of the river ; I pointed them out to Mr Yolkner. In sailing a little further it was evident there was considerable excitement. As we approached the landing place it was clear to me that we were amongst the Pai Marire fanatics. Mr. Levy's brother now in a low voice warned us from the bank to be careful as there was danger. Iron the time of crossing the bar return was out of the question; all we could do was to go on to the landing place, and before the anchor was dropped the vessel and all on board were in possession of the Natives. Mr. S. Levy had not been allowed to come down the river to give us any warning. AYe were told by several not to go on shore. After a while a tall Native, belonging to Taranaki, called Bapata, came on board, and in an authoritative manner, after everything had been examined, stood up and called out to the people on shore of what the cargo consisted. We remained on board until about three p.m., during which time there was great excitement on shore. Tiwai told us we had come into the " Lion's mouth." We also learned that Mr. Yolkner's house had been plundered, and that the European's stores had been examined, and a price fixed by the Natives at which Ihe goods were to be sold. We were now all ordered on shore ; this indeed appeared a dangerous moment. On landing one old fellow '.mule a rush on Mr. Volkner with a rope in his hand, but was pushed on one side. We v. eve all inarched oft', except the captain, to beside the Roman Catholic chapel. Here we remained standing for about two hours. The Natives in the meantime were holding a meeting; while the v. iinen employed themselves in dancing round us and staking the most horrid faces and gestures. The greatest excitement in the meantime was going on in the Catholic chapel, the people dancing and -shouting. At length the same Taranaki Native before mentioned with others came to us, and after some talk with him about a house to rest in, he had us all taken to one in an enclosure, about 300 yards from where we were standing. It was a miserably dirty jjlace; we could do nothing but make tl.e best of it. The next thing was to procure some food, and our blankets for sleeping. We now learned that the vessel had been rifled, and everything removed from her by the Natives; that tlic things had been all bundled into the store, and that the Natives had the key. At this time there were plenty to watch us, but we were not under guard. The sailors had been to the store and Lad procured a few of their things, but they returned without finding any of ours. It was now nearly dark. Mr. Yolkner and myself with the sailors returned to the store, and found as had been said, that the outer door was locked and the key taken away. We went into the adjoining room ; Mr. S. Levy was there. We procured a candle. There was a small door out of this room into the store, and after a good deal of searching, succeeded in finding all our things, and had them rtxnveyed to the house where we were to stay. After partaking of our evening meal in a very rough way, we read the 7th Psalm, the one appointed for this evening, and had prayers. The poor sailors joined us very heartily. After this when we retired to rest, these good-natured fellows gave us the best end of the little room. We did all that we could to comfort one another. We lay down to rest but not to sleep. Again and again did Mr. Yolkner and myself congratulate each other on being together. During the night we went out once or twice ; we were not locked nor were there any guards about the house. Had preparations been made, escape would have been easy. Until after midnight we could hear the greatest commotion and shouting going on in the Roman Catholic chapel. March 2nd. — Great excitement going on outside. We had prayers together, and read the 9th Psalm. Heard they were taking Mr. Levy's things out of the store, which had been put in the evening before. We began to think that money would satisfy them, and agreed to go and speak to Captain Levy ; our idea was to add something to what the Natives had already taken, and propose it as a ransom for us all. Mr. Yolkner spoke and said "we ought not to consider money if we could save life." The captain declined to have anything to do with us in the matter. AYe went away dejected, when poor dear Yolkner said "we must trust in God." We returned to our prison-house and had prayer all together again; we read the 10th Psalm. After this the tall Taranaki Native Bapata and another (a prophet) came to see us ; just now some grapes were brought to us. Henare brought also a quantity of bacon and other things belonging to Mr. Yolkner, and a kit of potatoes. While eating the grapes with them a long conversation took place, but to no purpose ; at the end one of them said to Mr. Yolkner in broken English " I see you are frightened." At this time they evidently knew what was to take place.) On leaving they begged two white shirts, and told us we should soon be at liberty. My dear friend gave them a shirt, but I declined. They told us that the meeting for which we had been waiting would take place in a short time; we quite believed that Patara had returned. After these men had left, another Native named Heremita (apparently known to Mr. Yolkner) came and asked us to give him all our things to take care of. He took them and put them into a box and departed. It was now about one o'clock, when we had prayer and reading for the last time ; the portion read the 14th Psalm. My poor dear friend offered a most earnest prayer. During the morning I could not help noticing tlie calmness of his manner and the beautiful smile that was on his face. Wo thought things looked nopefuL Mr. Yolkner's last act for his people was one of kindness: he was often the medium of communication to take down the half-yearly amount of a legacy to a Native ■.\ oman, the relict of a respectable European. About half-an-hour before he was taken I saw him pay

24

DESPATCHES TEOM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. "5.

over the money apparently with great satisfaction. This widow must have known what was going to happen, but she did not name it. About two p.m. a number of armed men (perhaps twenty) came, and after going through some ceremonies in front of the house, called to Mr. Volkner as we supposed to go to the meeting. I pressed again and again to go with him, stating the meeting was for us both, but to no purpose. IWH forced back and told that my turn would come next. They now locked the door and left eight armed men to keep guard. Again I pressed to go to the meeting but was refused, telling me I was to follow next. Two long hours of most painful suspense for us all passed away, but there was no return of Mr. Volkner. I listened during these long hours to hear the report of firearms, but having heard none I was not without hope that all was right. I now saw Heremita return who had led the party away, and sitting down some eight or ten yards from the house, he commenced telling the men left to guard us something to which they listened very attentively. I caught the words " kua whakatarewarewa ki runga kite whiro" (hung on the willow tree). These words went to my heart, I called upon the Lord. It did not necessarily follow that my friend was hung on the willow. I named it to the poor sailors and they thought all was over. Shortly in a state of great excitement all the armed men returned. I was first called out, then the sailors. They marched us off, they being in single file on each side of us. "When we reached the open space in front of the church there was great confusion and excitement, and cries of where are the others ? some saying they had escaped to the bush ; then there was confusion again as to where we were to be taken. All this time I was earnest in my inquiries for Mr. Volkner, but could get no satisfaction. We were now led to another house occupied by Mr. Hooper, a settler, outside of which we were robbed of everything our pockets contained. I begged of them to leave mo my little prayer-book, but they refused. AV^e were then led inside, and had our hands tied behind us. At this time, on inquiring, I was told that Mr. Volkner had been taken to another house. Shortly the captain and his brother and Mr. Agassiz were brought in and tied in the same manner as all the rest. All parties now seemed to think their end was come. I confess I did not. My mind halted between the feeling that this was a piece of mischief on the part of the Natives to give them an opportunity of robbing and frightening us, or that still it might be a fearful reality. Had I known of the murder of Mr. Volkner I should doubtless have thought differently. We were kept tied in this manner for about an hour and a half, during which time, some one wishing for water, a Native carrying a pannakin from one mouth to another served us with some. Next came in a Native and to our great surprise loosed us. I began to think that this part of the business was sham. I asked what it all meant; he answered me, " A time to bind and a time to loose, a time to kill and a time to make alive." I have now no doubt it was intended to give them an opportunity of robbing our persons, and to teach us that we were prisoners. Poor Mr. Hooper is a sick man, he was lying on a bed at the time in this house. The house was plundered. I saw a Native come in and take all the bed clothes from Mr. Hooper, almost robbing him on the ground. I remonstrated with him, and the cruel fellow, as he was leaving with the blankets in his hands, came up to me and said (somewhat ashamed), it was because the Pakeha had been very " pakeka " (hard) about a debt; and went off with the things. After this, upon inquiring about the house in which I had been told Mr. Volkner was, one of the Europeans said to me in a quiet way, " Ask no more for him, you will not see him again." This was the first certain information I had of his death. My worst fears were realized, and my heart was sad indeed. Of course, from what they told me when they took him off I fully expected to follow. "We were given to understand that we were to sleep in this house, but the three last who were tied were allowed to go elsewhere. The sailors now began to look after some food, of which they stood much in need. Henry, the teacher, in charge of Mr. Volkner's house, had in the morning brought us a quantity of very fat bacon ; this with some potatoes from the Natives, and tea, sugar, and biscuits from the store, supplied our wants. There were in this small house, which consisted of one small room about 18 feet by 12- —first, the sick man, four sailors, myself, and six or eight Natives—men, women, and children. The suffocation at night from so many people, and the fumes of tobacco were almost overpowering. Soon after dark we lay down on the floor. The sailors had by some means got their blankets from the prison-house we had left a few hours before, but mine had been taken by Heremita. 1 lay down next to one of the sailors, John Moore. They had managed to spare a blanket for me, and this good-natured fellow made a pillow for me of his coat. I could not sleep. There was too much moving about to have evening prayer, and I could only in private commend myself and companions to the watchful care of our Heavenly Father. I had every reason to believe that this would be my last night on earth. G-od's gracious presence did not forsake me. As I lay awake I could distinctly hear the confusion, dancing, and shouting going on in the Eomish chapel, and also in the church. This ended this terrible day upon which the first blood was shed in New Zealand for the Gospel's sake. TnE Mitbdee. I am thankful to say I did not witness the death of dear Mr. Volkner, I can therefore only give the substance of what I heard on the spot; when he was led away from me, we both supposed it was to a meeting. He was first marched to near the church, where it appeared that his coat and waistcoat were taken from him. He was then taken about 200 yards in another direction to beneath a willow tree. If not before he was now doubtless convinced of their intention. He asked them to let him have his prayer-book, which was left in his coat pocket. They brought it. He then knelt down and prayed, arose, and shook hands with his murderers and said, " I am ready." While they continued shaking hands with him he was hoisted up. I have heard two reports as to the time he struggled. Dr. Agassiz, thought not longer than a quarter of an hour, others said an hour or more and that when taken down. there were still signs of life. I hope the latter opinion is incorrect; there can be no doubt that he was allowed to hang for upwards of an hour. I also heard that they shot him while hanging. When taken down, he was carried to near the church beside a small house belonging to the station. Here he was laid down and the head taken off with a considerable portion of the breast. Heremita, the Maori who came to us a little before Mr. Volkner was led off, and who took all our things under pretence of taking care of them, and who afterwards was the leader of those who carried him off, was the person G

25

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5

who cut off his head. The scene when this was done appears to have been most dreadful. They were eager to taste his blood, and many rubbed it on their faces, and some of his old friends took part in all this. From my own observance the people appeared to me for the most part to be half lunatic and so worked up by their new religion, as to be ready for any work of the Devil. In cleaning the head, pieces of the flesh were thrown about with the bones of the neck. Kereopa forced out the eyes and swallowed them, and afterwards desired the body to be given to the dogs. Some one also wished it buried. It was at length thrown into what appeared to be a dry unused water closet, and very lightly covered with earth. It is a significant fact that Pokeno, the son of Aporotenga, the Opotiki chief murdered by Tohe's wife in the fight near Matata, was the individual who put the rope round Mr. Volkner's neck. March 3rd. —This was a dreadful day of bitter suspense. The excitement great. I now learned that Patara had not returned. I was under the impression that Mr. Volkner had not only been killed, biit eaten. It was not therefore too much to suppose that I should be taken off and served in the same way, having been told " that my turn was to come next." At an early hour I heard the noise of their horrid worships, I saw their ovens lighted, but all passed over without their interfering with me. At this time I learned some particulars relative to the murder, and supposed in the course of the day I should be marched off. In the forenoon, Deborah, the wife of Henry, an old Native teacher, came to me to inquire what things Mr. Volkner had brought down with him in the vessel. I told her I knew of nothing but a dozen bottles of wine for the sick, which had been given him, and some medicine. In the most scornful manner possible she said in bad English "it is all gammon." After this I understood they were holding a meeting. I thought it well to send a proposition to them by a Native, I proposed the sum of £500 as a ransom. To my great comfort I found this morning in the house, amongst some books of Mr. Hooper's, a small prayer-book, which, with his kind permission, I made use of. I afterwards found it had poor dear Volkner's name in it. Some of the Psalms for the days appeared written for the occasion. About noon I had an interview with the captain, when for the first time he told me that his loss was occasioned by us. He was exceedingly urgent for me to give him a document to that effect. I declined doing so, on the ground that I was not aware we had occasioned his loss, and that the present was not the time to investigate such matters. I expected every hour to be taken off to die. I was much cast down at this request, it made an impression upon me that I cannot forget. The day had passed, Patara had not returned. Not having slept since our arrival, I was quite exhausted, and this night I slept soundly. 4th. —Another day of suspense ; another request from the captain for a document. This repetition destroyed my confidence. He was angry that I had proposed a ransom of £500 ; he should now have to ransom his men. Mr. Volkner, who knew Patara, had spoken of him as a bad Native, so that I had little to hope for on his return. Having spoken about the body of Mr. A Tolkner being properly buried, Captain Levy assured me to-day that he had supplied clean coverings for the body, and had it decently interred. This turned out afterwards quite false. During the day I had heard it said that I was to be sent to Taranaki. In the evening it was reported that Patara had returned. sth.—Heard the meeting was to take place in the forenoon. I sent a request to see Patara. He passed Mr. Hooper's house, where I was, and shook hands with me. The few words I had with him made me hopeful. About an hour after we were summoned to the meeting. "What kind of trial, and what sort of charges were to be brought against me I knew not. On my way the feeling of conscious helplessness flashed across my mind, followed by the words of our Lord, Matt. x. 19 —" But when they deliver you up take no thought," &c. We assembled in the new church, to the building of which our friend had directed so much labor and care. Chairs from Mr. Volkner's house were brought for all Europeans, besides the Taranaki fanatics, who took their seats within the communion rails; there were perhaps a little over 300 Natives of the place present. The Trial. Patara sat outside in front, about three yards from the communion rails. He commenced with expressions of anger against all Soldiers, Ministers, and Englishmen ; but for all Jews, Frenchmen, Scotchmen, Austrians, and Germans, he had love. Me. Vouchee's Case. Three charges were brought against him by different Natives to justify his death. 1. His going to Auckland as a spy for the Government. 2. A cross had been found in his house, and therefore he was a Romanist and a deceiver. 3.' He returned to Opotiki after having been told to remain away. The witness to the first charge was named Timothy, formerly a Native teacher. He said that Karawera (Father Garavel) I conclude he meant, had told them that they would all be " mate" (dead) through Mr. Volkner going to and fro to Auckland to take korero (talk) to the Governor. Second charge respecting the cross broke down. Third —Several witnesses spoke to this, who had told Mr. Volkner not to return. I was able from their own remarks to show that no committee had been held to tell him to stay away, but only a few separate individuals had told him to do so. Patara very cleverly, in winding up, tried to make it appear that he should have stayed away because he knew we were at war, but he did not say that he justified the murder ; I think he regretted it. Mx own Case. Patara: "What did you come here for ? To go to Whakatane and Matata at the request of the people themselves. What did you go to Taupo lately for ? To fulfil my promise, and in answer to several letters sent to Auckland asking me to go. Why did not the Governor let them have clothing ? Because they were at war.

26

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OE NEW

A.—No. 5.

Why did we teach these things for the soul only, and not for the body ? Because of the great Talue of the soul; but we have taught you many things for the body. Gave instances and referred to Matt. vi. 33. Why did you not teach this new religion we have found out ? Because we did not know it. Our religion is the word of God. Patara said we had taught them to repeat —to be baptised, to receive the Lord's supper, and not to commit adultery, but now they had found out this was all " maminga" (deceit.) Then followed a long discussion on the land question. All the arguments in common use amongst Natives were brought forth. All these I answered by saying that neither Mr. Volkner nor myself had any land. Turning to the other Europeans, he had the Jews pointed out, to distinguish them from the English sailors ; one of them (by the way) had the good fortune of being supposed to be a Scotchman. Addressing Mr. Levy, Patara said— Are you a Jew ? Tes, I your brother; lam a Jew. What did you come for ? To bring down trade. Are you willing to come here to live ? Tes. Will you leave your brother here ? Consented. Have you a wife ? Tes. Tou come here and live, you shall have a piece of land. No one shall hurt you. Wished him to bring down his wife and family. Are you offended at them taking your things ? Why should I, when I gave them. A young man from Taranaki, a Native, a prophet whom they called " Doctor," acted as interpreter for the Levy's. It was done in bad English. Turning to Mr. S. Levy : Patara —Are you his brother ? Tes. Will you stay here or go with me to Turanga ? Stay here. Mr. S. Levy sat next to me. I cautioned him and said, if you do not take care you will be a hostage for your brother's return. He replied, we know what we are doing. Concluded that Mr. S. Levy was to remain at Opotiki, and that the captain was to continue to bring trade. Turning again to myself, he said, you must go with me to Turanga. I objected that I could not travel on native food, &c. , Several spoke up and said I was very strong to walk, named my formerly travelling on the East Coast, and latterly in Taupo. Told them I was not so strong now, and had not travelled on native food. Proposed to them again either to take a ransom for me in money or to make an exchange of prisoners. After some discussion they agreed to take Hori Tupaea. Patara promised to write a letter to Tauranga for Hori to be liberated, which the captain volunteered to take and bring back Hori or a letter from him, and one from Mr. Clarke, the magistrate, on the part of the Government, to say he was at liberty. This done and I should be free. Here the meeting ended. I spoke to Patara, who said he would see me again. At night he sent me word I might write to my wife, but he must first see the letter. The trial ended thus : —Nothing was decided about the murder of Mr. Volkner ; I was a prisoner until Hori Tupaea should be brought to Opotiki, or known for certain to be at liberty; Mr. S. Levy was a hostage for his brother to continue trading. It was understood that the vessel should be given up, and another meeting was to be held to arrange about payment for what had been taken from Captain Levy. Feeling more at liberty after this trial, I changed my abode to Tiwai's house. 6th. —I saw Patara early this morning and toldfhim that Hori Tupaea was really at liberty. He said they were going to have a meeting that day at Opotiki (inland eight miles) before they started for Turanga, and wished me to go to it. He also told me that I was at liberty to go about, that they were not like the Pakeha who shut up their prisoners. He charged the people to see I had plenty of food. Saw Patara again at about ten a.m., when they were starting inland. He spoke kindly. I declined going inland, but pressed to be set at liberty. He said he would agree to it if the others would, and that if the meeting consented ho would himself return in the evening to tell me, and if not send the letter about Hori Tupaea. I questioned him about Bishop Williams. He said he would go to him himself, and send him quietly away. I then advised him to keep close to his people, and not to leave them again, as I felt sure if he had been here Mr. Volkner would not have been killed. Saw the prisoner John Brown, a soldier, and sent messages by him to Bishop Williams. I did not dare to write. I learned much from this prisoner about the Taupo station, which had been plundered by this party on their way from Taranaki to this place. I also now learned that had I been caught in Taupo when I was there in January that I would have been killed. The vessel was given up ; the sailors returned to her to-day, and began to pump her out and set things to rights. Dr. Agassiz kindly cut his pencil in two and gave me one-half. Tiwai also gave me a little note paper to write to Mrs. Grace. I was now able to make notes. Had before this applied to the captain and his brother for a little note paper, knowing they had plenty, but had been refused. Fortunately a monthly number of the " Evangelical Alliance" which I had put in my pocket on leaving Auckland had by some means escaped the general plunder. The fly leaves of this with all the broad margin and the blank leaves of a Native Testament, by writing very small, served my purpose ; but I was in a difficulty how to keep my pencil in order. It was not more than two inches long; my knife had been taken, nor could I procure one. To supply this want, at the same time not to waste my pencil, I kept a couple of pebbles in my pocket, one a little coarser than the other, on these I rubbed it, and kept a very fair point on it. Patara on leaving had spoken so kindly about them treating me well, that I immediately made application for some of my linen cravats, comb and brush, and shaving materials, &c. After a while, to my great surprise, Heremita brought a shirt and razor. These were a great boon, but far from all I wanted. Two Natives came this afternoon, and sat with me for a long time. I made many inquiries of them respecting their new superstition, and tried to shew them that the new language they supposed

27

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5,

some of their people spoke were for the most part sounds without any meaning. They said the Jews (Captain Levy and his brother) told them that " the new talk was Hebrew." These two fellows appeared very civil, wished to know if I would teach them figures. I told them if they would come daily I would; they promised to do so. While they were with me I wrote a pencil note in native to Mrs. Grace, and gave it to them to read. I afterwards wrote a copy of it, and asked them to compare the two. The copy was to be kept for other Natives in case the original was sent. There was a hope of the vessel going next day. The captain told me this morning, apparently by accident, that he intended to effect his brother's escape. Night came ; Natives returned from the meeting inland, but Patara did not come, nor could I hear anything of the letter he was to send. The vessel had been given up, and news came that the meeting had agreed that payment was to be made for the things taken from the captain; but my case seemed now very dark and doubtful, and in case the captain effected the escape of his brother, hopeless. I lay down to rest, but could not sleep. In the morning Patara and his party were to start for Turanga. About twenty Opotiki Natives were going with them, which would make in all about fifty. 7th.—l had concluded during the night, if I could procure a horse to go off eight miles inland to see Patara before he started for Turanga, and make sure of the letter at least. I could not get a horse, and did not go. A few of the Natives had not yet returned, and the letter might still come. I had reason also to be disturbed at what the captain told me about the escape of his brother, he having agreed that his brother should remain, and that he himself would be the medium of communication to carry Patara's letter, and to bring back Hori Tupaea. My life was thus in his hands. To depart now from this arrangement by taking off his brother, who was a hostage for him to continue trading, but whose life was in no danger, was to destroy all that had been settled at the trial, and to make my case hopeless. I therefore told him this, and showed him that if ho had not promised to leave his brother and take the letter it would have been different, but that now it would be wrong unless he could get both off together. I expressed my willingness not to escape without his brother. He stormed at me and cursed the trial, &c, &c. I quietly told him that he must remember I could prevent his doing so. After this I was subject to much abuse, and that too in the presence of the Natives ; and was daily insulted because I would not give them a document to cover their loss. Time hung heavily on my hands. The want of congenial society was very painful. The constant oaths and curses I was accustomed to, made me seek society amongst the Natives rather than the Europeans, except in the case of Dr. Agassiz, who was kind; but I was closely watched, and every opportunity taken to keep me from the Natives. I was glad to find a book, belonging I think to Mr. Hooper, " Memoirs of Garibaldi." This filled some of my spare time. What struck me most in reading it, was the wonderful preservation of that bravo man through a long series of years under circumstances often desperate. It encouraged me to hope. Why should I doubt ? This afternoon Patara's letter arrived, the captain got it. I proposed in the evening that it should be opened, that we might know whether it was genuine, which I was led to doubt, for we had learned that the vessel was to be detained for ten days' longer. He refused to allow me to do so. I promised to be responsible for opening it, but he would not consent. Bth.—Abuse was now so common that I felt it impossible to go on ; something must be done. Saw a man to-day with my red blanket and trowsers on. Told him they were mine. He said they had been given to him. I found he was from Whakatane. Spoke to him about taking Patara's letter to Tauranga. He proposed to take it overland for £5. (With respect to this letter, on which my life depended, thus refused to be opened sent or copied, Mr. Wm. Hooper since writes me to say —" Now he the said Morris Levy opened the letter in my house; locked my house doors during the time I read over the letter, as he did not know how to read it himself.") Had a meeting with Dr. Agassiz about giving a document respecting loss. Explained to him my position. He advised me under the circumstances to give one. I wrote one out and left it with him, and a second for the captain to sign for the delivery of Patara's letter at Tauranga. The captain, owing to my reluctance to give a document, had become so violent that I was unwilling to talk with him any more on the subject. I went out of the room, and he went in to Dr. Agassiz. My memorandum was not satisfactory. At this time a lunatic had just been discovered who had exhumed the body of Mr. Volkner, had taken off tho clothes, and put them on himself. I immediately renewed my former request, and spoke to the Natives to have a proper grave, when the younger Mr. Levy abused me in their presence. Wished to know what it was to me: told me to mind my own business. Notwithstanding, I went with the Natives and showed them where I wished it buried—at the end of the church. Abused again by Captain Levy with oaths. He declared it should be buried in another place, away from the church, close to the hole it had been in. After a while as I was walking about, I saw Henare and Eru with spades looking about the spot I had fixed upon. Eru came towards me and called me to mark the place; I went and did so, and they began to dig; they were remarkably civil. I asked them if there was any objection to my reading the burial service ; they said there was none, and promised to be present. I went to ask Dr. Agassiz if he would join me in reading the burial service. On returning to the grave, the captain and Mr. S. Levy were both there, with some of the sailors. I was again abused with oaths. I expressed a wish to give the body Christian burial; he cursed me and the service. I was then pushed violently away to a distance. After a time I wrote on a slip of wood requesting to see the body interred, and without waiting for a reply went to the grave. Afterwards, when I asked the Levys why they used me so, and said was it not natural that I should wish to bury my brother, the answer I received was, you repudiate our loss. Time still hung heavily on my hands, and my feelings for my family were most intense. The prospect was so dark that, judging from appearances, I could not expect to see them again; while the daily persecution I was enduring on account of the loss the Levys said they had sustained through Mr. Volkner and myself embittered everything, but Grod's word strengthened me, and I was able to take comfort in reading the Evening Psalms, particularly the 42nd and 43rd ; and could not help believing I should yet be free.

28

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5.

9th.—ln conversing this morning with an old woman, I found she was returning to "Whakatane, and that the people there wished me to be free. I therefore ventured to scud by her a few lines on a scrap of paper torn from the margin of a periodical. Dr. A gamin kindly came down, and with his advice I wrote the document respecting loss, in the form demanded, on condition that Captain Levy would sign another, to deliver Patara's letter at Tauranga. He refused the latter, except on condition of an indefinite indemnity for going into Tauranga, to which I could not consent. I left my memorandum with Dr. Agassiz to give up upon receiving the other from the captain. I should have consented to write the above document before, if I had been satisfied in my own mind. Yrom the first mention of the subject, it had appeared to mo that Mr. Yolkner and myself being on board the schooner, might have been to a great extent the cause of the captain's loss, and had more than once stated this to him. Tiwai and another Native named Eauapira had both said it was so ; and Dr. Agassiz had given a document stating he had heard the captain say he would give up all to save us, and had more than once advised me to give the required document. I therefore felt it right to give way ; also, the only apparent chance of my life being saved, was, in getting the captain to fulfil his agreement to deliver at Tauranga, Patara's letter for Hori Tupaea. In addition to this, the daily persecution I was enduring on account of not giving the document had become quite insupportable. Evidence has since proved that the captain's loss was not caused by our being on board. 10th.—From various remarks of the Natives it is evident they will not allow the vessel to sail yet. This is the tenth day from our arrival, but only five days since Patara left. The Natives say the rain has prevented them from bringing payment for what they have taken from Captain Levy. I have had several inquiries from the Natives as to whom he is going to take away. I told them 1 did not know. They were evidently keeping a close watch that he should not take oft' his brother. I often wished to visit Mr. Volkner's house to look for some books, but difficulties were always raised. However, Henare sent me down a couch, and a quantity of very good biscuit, half a bag of sugar, a lot of tea, and some candles, belonging to dear Volkner. How he had managed to retain these things I cannot tell, I had the sofa put into an empty store, adjoining Tiwai's house, so that I now slept alone, having exchanged the floor for a bed, and a close room and fumes of tobacco for a good air. 11th.—Everything fair for sailing if the Natives would let the vessel go. At about five p.m. a woman came up and told me that she was from Whakatane, and immediately after, two men from the same place said they had a letter from their people to let me go. At this time there was a meeting going on to stop the vessel. I went to the meeting and said a few words. The Natives would not allow the vessel to go until the tenth day from Patara's departure. They said they wanted time to bring payment for the things they had taken, and that on Monday it would bo carted in. ltcport says that the Ngatiawas (the people of Whakatane and Matata) may be expected on Monday to set me free; the two men just arrived have brought word that Hori Tupaea is at liberty. Had evening prayer in native with these two men. 12th. —Sunday. How unlike Sunday ; not one sign remains to tell it is the day of rest. After having morning prayer without anyone to join me, I paid my accustomed visit to the grave of dear Yolkner, and afterwards went to see Dr. Agassiz, and arranged finally to meet in the morning to read the; burial service. He spoke about the document I had signed ;he said he had left it on the table in Captain Levy's store till he got the other from the captain, but lie would go and see for it. 13th.—Eparaima, a Native of Turanga, who knew me when 1 lived there twelve years ago, came from Whakatane with a letter and a message from the prophet of that place to release me. He appears very desirous for my liberation, and cried very much; he is going inland to a meeting, and will I feel sure do his best for me. At about nine a.m. I met the doctor to read the burial service over poor dear Yolkner. It was truly a solemn hour. This is a martyr's grave, and the fine church which through his exertions has been erected, is his best monument. Never shall I forget the burial. My heart was filled with mingled feelings of thankfulness and sorrow. Never did I read our beautiful service with such satisfaction. Never did the words " Blessed are the dead which die in the Lord," appear so appropriate. I could not help at the conclusion asking Dr. Agassiz that in case anything happened, to have me buried if possible by the side of dear Volkner. I saw quantities of potatoes and corn carted to the vessel to-day, in payment for what the Natives had taken. The doctor thinks that Mr. Levy will lose about £50. 14th. —Otcre te Aruhi, an old man, lias just told me that they will pay the captain for all they have taken. He also says that he told Mr. Yolkner not to return. I walked out in the afternoon about a mile and a half on the road to Waikohika, expecting to see Eparaima, who proposed to return again this evening. At this distance I came to a new fortified pa, and went into it, but saw no Natives. It is situated amongst swamps, apparently approachable only from the front. The river is only a short distance behind. It is built with strong posts filled between with long manaku sticks ten or twelve feet long; inside this, there is a row of deep rifle pits, and behind them a high earthwork measuring from the bottom of the pits about twelve feet high. This pa I have been told is only one of three or four more said to be stronger than this. I walked about until sunset when I returned. I did not see Eparaima, but he returned late in the evening. The meeting of Eparaima with the people has been so far satisfactory, that if I could procure a letter from the prophet at Matata, I might get off. It was a mistake in Eparaima to come without one. The captain has been very abusive because I have made an offer of money to Tiwai if he will go to Matata and procure me a letter from the prophet. The vessel is to leave in the morning, but whether she will sail to Tauranga and take Patara's letter for Hori Tupaea, or go on to Auckland, I have not the smallest knowledge. The sailors do not seem to know. 15th. —The vessel has dropped down the river this morning. Eparaima has just left for Turanga, but will not go further to-day than Waikohika. I have sent letters by him to Bishop Williams to send me help if possible. Nearly all the Natives were at Waikohika to-day. A new pole for their worship is to be consecrated, and there is to be a feast. I wished to see Eparaima again, and therefore resolved to go. Eru Hapo walked with me ; he told me as we went that H

29

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5

they would complete the payment for all they had taken from the captain. I inquired of him why hi* people robbed the vessel. He said the Taranaki people began plundering at Taranaki; had carried it to Taupo, where they robbed my house ; and from thence brought their law (tikanga) to this place. On my inquiring why they had all gone over to this new religion which allowed of murder plunder and adultery, he told me that the Jews had told him that this new religion was the religion of the Jews ; but answered me that he had not joined it. I feel quite sure that this man did not approve of the murder of poor Volkner. My chief object in venturing out so far as to Waikohika was to see Eparaima before he went to Turanga. Things looked so very gloomy that the prospect of my liberation appeared further oft" than ever, and I feared the return of the Taranaki Natives from Turanga, when according to report I was to be taken off to Taranaki. I had sent letters on to Bishop Williams and I now thought it best to make up all the notes of my journal in a small packet, and send them also by Eparaima to the Bishop to be forwarded to Auckland. They are rather a curiosity, being written in pencil very small on little scraps of paper. It appeared very likely this would be the last that would be heard of me. I found Eparaima at Waikohika, and sat down beside him. Immediately other Natives came and sat down with us. After this I got up and walked about and in a little while called Eparaima to come and speak to me, when Timoti got up and said, if I had anything to say to Eparaima I must say it before them all. I saw we were being watched and was afraid they would perhaps search him and take from him the two letters he had already. I did not now dare to give him my journal. The people seemed sulky yet civil. They gave me some water-melon. After this I stayed about an hour. The pole or rather flagstaff was not finished. They were working very hard at it, and it was to be consecrated in the afternoon. There were about 300 people present ; scarcely any Natives were left in Opotiki proper, from whence I had I come. Thinking it better to leave before the excitement became great I shook hands with a good many and then returned. On my way back I met the captain, his brother, and Tiwai, going to see the consecration of the post. The vessel had not been able to get out of the river and was at the heads. Evening. —Another storming from the captain for going out to "VVaikohika this evening ; told me that it would have served me right if they had hung me up to one of the yard-arms of the post. The Natives of Waikohika were so late with their feast that only a very few have returned. No wind for the vessel to get out. They hope to sail in the morning. The sailors came up and were desirous to serve me, by taking letters or seeing Mrs. Grace for me. I gave them a letter for Archdeacon Brown in case they went to Tauranga, or for Mrs. Grace if they went to Auckland ; after which I wrote another for the Bishop of New Zealand, which I had hoped to give them the next morning. 16th.—Thursday. As I was dressing, Tiwai came to the door and said, " there is a vessel outside." After dressing I walked outside the enclosure, and distinctly saw her three masts. About half-past seven, just as we were commencing breakfast, Captain Levy went on to the top of the house ;on coming back, he said, she has come to. He left the breakfast and went out. I heard him sa-v, give me a paddle. I immediately got up and went out to the bank of the river. Saw the captain and his brother getting into a canoe close below me; I said, take me with you. I protested strongly that it was not right to leave me. They pushed oft", and in a moment, without a word further, paddled down the river with all speed. This act placed the vessel and crew in jeopardy. I went back and took a little breakfast, when it was announced that some one had landed from the steamer away to the right of where I was, the river bearing away to the left. I went out of the enclosure with Tiwai and ~\\~m. King (an assessor from a distance) ; Dr. Agassiz was also there. They were all in a state of excitement, and were going off to meet the messengers from Turanga. I begged first of Tiwai, and then of "VVm. King, for one of them, both being Government officers, to stay with me, as I should be carried oft', and no one would know where I was. They refused saying they would be killed, and told me to stay where I was. 'I felt forsaken on every hand. I now went into my room, and committed myself to the care of our Heavenly Father, and afterwards made the following note : —" I consider that I should not have been left here, but hare been kept in the front, or put on board our own vessel, which there has been nothing to prevent up to this time. lam left here to tempt the NatiTes to take me oft"." Great excitement was going on all this time outside—men flying off in all directions on horseback to call the people together : the bell of the Eoman Catholic chapel ringing for a meeting of the few present, while the shouting and noise was incessant. I walked about for upwards of an hour and a half expecting every moment to be seized and killed. There was no one near where I was but an old woman, nearly all the Natives were away inland, four miles oft", and the rest were gathering at a distance to meet the Turanga messengers. 1 walked about, waved my hat to the schooner for them to come for me, but all to no purpose. At length to my surprise 1 saw the boat coming up the river with the captain, the mate, John Moore, and Lewis Montague. ]t came to, at the store of Mr. Levy, about forty yards below where 1 was. Shortly young Montague came to me and said: if you will go round to the point where you were yesterday we will take you in. The old woman was in the yard at the time. I walked quietly out and passed the store where Captain Levy and the mate were getting out goods as fast as possible. 1 now saw that to go to the point named was to run into the greatest danger, as I must have to pass through a number of small villages ; I therefore only worked my way through one, and then got down on the bank of the river, and when about fifty yards below the store, where the boat still was, John Moore, I think it was, called out " stop." In a couple of minutes they dropped down to me, and without anyone but the old woman seeing me, I got into the boat and lay down and was quickly rowed down to the schooner without any opposition. The goods saved from the store were now deposited in the schooner, and another of the sailors, Owen Jones, with the greatest willingness came on board the boat, and in ten minutes more I was safely on board 11.M.5..5. " Eclipse." Captain Fremantle immediately sent out his boats to tow out the schooner, and in o short time all were safe. The two Turanga messengers were still on shore, and after great perseverance on the

30

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

.-'A.—No,' 5.

part of Captain Fremantle, the Bishop of New Zealand, and Mr. Eice (a magistrate from Tauranga,) they were finally brought off next morning. It is duo to the Natives of Opotiki to say that fromthc time of our being tied in Hooper's hous,e, on the evening of the 2nd, I did not receive the smallest indignity from any of them. They were respectful, some were kind, and now and then a few were cool. No. 37. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the CotOKIEB. Sib, — Government House, Auckland. 27th April. 1865. Adverting to my Despatch to you, No. 26, of the 7th February last, in which I transmitted a petition numerously signed by the Inhabitants of the Province of Auckland, praying Her Majesty to temporarily constitute the Northern portion of this Island into a separate Colony, I have the honor now to transmit the additional signatures which have been received from the out-settlements since that Despatch was written. I have, &c, The Right Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 38. Hia Excellency the Governor to the Right Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sin, — Government House, Auckland, 2nd May, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information the copy of a report, dated the 18th ultimo from Mr. Clarke, the Civil Commissioner at Tauranga. 2. This report contains some important information regarding the Pai Marire fanatics, and regarding the probability that Hori Tupaea and the party of fanatics who accompanied him, and who were arrested by Colonel Greer's orders, were acting on a pre-arranged plan with the other parties of fanatics, which quite accords with the information the Government had previously received. 3. When Mr. Clarke wrote his report, a copy of which is enclosed, he was not aware of the great change of feelings amongst the Natives, which had taken place on the East Coast of this Island, and he therefore viewed matters under a very gloomy aspect. I have, &c, The Right Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. Enclosure to No. 38. The Civil Commissioner, Tauranga, to the Hon. the Native Minister. Sir, — Civil Commissioner's Office, Tauranga, 18th April, ISCS. In compliance with the instructions conveyed in your letter of March 18th, No. 91, I have the honor to report, for the information of the Government, on the state of the Natives, in so far as I have had the means of obtaining intelligence. From information derived from many different sources, it is evident that a hostile movement is in contemplation by the Waikato and their confederates against the Arawa, which if carried out will inevitably involve many of the Ngaiterangi hapus. Many of the friendly Natives are so impressed with the certainty of this, and of their being obliged to defend themselves, that they have applied to the Colonel commanding this district and myself for firearms. I enclose a translation of their letter. Since the receipt of the letter, they have called upon me, and expressed great anxiety on the subject. They fear falling victims to the Pai Marire fanatics, on account of their steady attachment to the Pakeha. They explain that they do not want the arms, &c, now, and they will be quite satisfied if they are placed under the charge of the officer commanding the district, to be given out only when danger is at hand. I would recommend this to the notice of the Government. The Arawa arc making every preparation to resist any force that the Waikato may be able to bring against them. They are anxious as to the result of a simultaneous attack on both their parties. Should Kereopa and Patara succeed in persuading a large body of East Coast Natives to come up with them and attack the Arawa country on the East, and the AVaikato under "William Thompson on the West, I fear that the Arawas will be hard pressed, and will require all the assistance that can possibly be rendered by the Government. This is supposed to be the plan of the enemy, as may be gathered from a letter addressed by William Mann to Colonel Grecr and myself, a translation of which I beg to enclose. The success of Kereopa and Patara on the East Coast on the one hand and the apparent inaction of the Government on the other, is producing a most baneful effect upon the Natives in this neighbourhood. The Pai Marire party arc exulting, and say to our friends, " There! It has happened just as we have told you. The Hau Hau God has par&lized the efforts of the Pakeha ; they cannot avenge the death of Mr. Volkner ; they are fleeing before him." Although many have ostensibly given up the Pai Marire worship, it has only been from fear of the consequences to themselves on account of the close proximity of the troops. I will venture to predict that should the troops be removed from Tauranga while the present feeling exists, it would be untenable twenty-four hours after the ships left the harbour for any European. This may appear a bold assertion, but I make it advisedly, and I appeal to those Europeans resident in this district who from long acquaintance with the Native character are most likely to form a correct opinion. Many of the Natives of this district, especially those closely connected with the Patetere and AVilliam Thompson's people, have again left for their inland " kaingas," so that (it is reported) they can practise their Pai Marire worship unmolested. Under these circumstances, I have thought it advisable to caution the surveyors against carrying on surveys in that neighbourhood. In every respect we are in a most unsatisfactory state. The acts of the Pai Marire Natives on the East Coast, and the evident satisfaction evinced by the Pai Marire professors everywhere at the fearful

NNo. 57.

No.-58. Mr. Clarke to Natiye Minister; Tiuiranga, 18th April, 1865.

31

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A..—No. 5

*©potiki tragedy, and the discomfiture of the Europeans on the East Coast, show the real state of mind -of the bulk of the Native population. They firmly believe that the Pakeha will be driven into the sea. I do not put the lea^t faith in any promise coming from either " Te pooti o to riro kore" or " Pooti ote rire." Neither are to be trusted, and unless some active measures are not soon taken to check the fanatics, I fear we shall have to record many such diabolical acts as occurred at Opotiki. From information we have lately heard it in reported, with every probability of truth, that Hori Tupaea and party were acting with the other Pai Marire fanatics on a pre-arranged plan, and were to have met at Whakatane. Comparing dates at the usual rate of travelling on such occasions, they would have met at Whakatane. Another rather startling fact is that one of the Tius, now a prisoner in this camp, has had concealed about his person an axe-head, which was only discovered some time after his return from Wellington. "Was this intended as an instrument of execution, blessed by Te Ua, or has it been used as such on any former occasion ? I beg to enclose two documents received from the East Coast, one a copy of instructions to Kcreopa and Patara, issued by " Te Ua Haumene," and the other a circular letter written in English, evidently by the deserter accompanying Kereopa's expedition, signed " William Butler" (Patara.) I have, &c, HZETBY J. CIaEKE, The Hon. the Native Minister, "Wellington. Civil Commissioner. r To Mr. Clarke,— Te Matapihi, 14th April, 1865. Friend, —Salutations. Listen you to the plan we have considered on hearing the word of Waikato and also the word of "William Thompson, viz., that he had ceased to have any consideration (for peace) ; that he had left Te Uu to carry out his own designs. The word of Waikato is, that they have no consideration for Ngaiterangi ; that they (Ngaiterangi) will be all exterminated, and the Arawa : also. It is quite true that this threat has been made. The tribes who are attached to the G-overnor will be destroyed. We have been considering about guns, powder, and lead (ball) for us. Friend, do not be long considering this matter ; we know not when (how soon) evil may touch us. Friend, hasten to consider; but it is not necessary to consider long, because we can see in our hearts the thoughts of those men who (used to be) leaders ; they are silent now, but we know. Friend, hasten to submit our request and yours also, because you are the Commissioner of Tauranga, and the medium through which the plans put forth by the chiefs are to be submitted. Wihemu Patens, Hoiiepa Pahaone, Wibemu Paheba. ' To Colonel Greer and Mr. Clarke,— 12th April, 1865. Sins, —Don't be weary on account of the many reports in circulation. On this very day, Tamate Hapunana returned from the Taheke (Rotorua). He went from this yesterday, and returned to-day. He met a messenger from l'ahirua, who states that the Waikato army is in the cultivations. They number one hundred and fifty, under Matutaera (the King). They are waiting for the rest of Waikato and Kereopa's party from the South ; they are also waiting for William Thompson's party. When all the war party of Waikato is assembled, Ngatiraukawa will bring up the rear; when they have accomplished this, then we shall hear certainly whether the enemy intend to attack the lakes or Maketu. The Paerauta (the Natives inland of Rotorua) who number one hundred and fifty, say that if they arrange to attack the lakes, they will withdraw and become Queen's men ; if Maketu, they will agree, becnuse it is occupied by white skins, the race they had threatened in years gone by. A man from Te Puke has arrived, who states that he has heard that two hundred and fifty (the vanguard) have arrived at Te Puke. The messenger of Kercopa and Patara has arrived at Waikato. Kereopa and Patara have a protecting party of three hundred, but where this army of Kereopa's is, is not yet known ; had it been known, we should have heard from Tukehu and Hohaia. In my opinion the reason why the Waikato party is keeping close in the bush is, that they are waiting for Kereopa's fighting party ; when Kereopa is close in the neighbourhood, they will attack Maketu to divert our attention, while Kereopa quietly slips into our pas. lam sending a messenger ■to see about this party of Matutaera's (the King.) Written by William Marsh. Bth April, 1865. This is to show my opinion regarding the subject of the letter (copied below). It is possible that the threat held out by Kereopa to Awa at Whakatane, when he said that on his return from the South he would destroy all non-combatants, whether Maori or Pakeha —that is to say, all the unarmed, •is correct. One of his threats was, that when he returned from canvassing for war that then the God 'of War would show himself. As soon as the blockade has been declared war is at hand. My reason for these remarks is on account of this letter from Puhirua of which this is a copy. To William Hikairo,— Puhirua, 2nd April, 18G5. Fbhens, —Salutations. This is my word to you. Come to this place on the receipt of this t letter. There is a fixed purpose (I am serious) in what I now say to you. Hearken you, this is the time for you to return to us ; if you leave it for some future time you will not be able to come. Do ■ you listen, your relative William Thompson is gone to fetch all his relations. For this reason, we say to you come back to us. This Island is saved (or showing itself above water) ;do not be faithless, but believing. Do not tell this to any one. keep it to yourself.

32

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.-No. 5

With regard to your own word respecting the horse, it shall be sent if you pay attention to what I have already said. If yovi will not come (now), you will not be able to come bye and bye, on account of the blockade of the " Ingiki" (a Pai Marire omeial of high standing) ; but Friend, do come. From Ekeataea. "When lie says that this Island is saved, he means that it will be saved by this Pai Marire God. (Copied by "William Marsh). The letter was handed to me by William. William Hikairo (to be copied), and sent on to you and Colonel Greer, but keep it to yourselves. Do not let the natives hear of it, lest it be generally known, and we be kept in ignorance by the enemy of the near approach of the day of battle; they intend to inform W. Hikairo secretly, but perhaps they are deceiving. Let us wait and see. COPT of Hokopapeea's written instructions to the two Pai Marire parties now at Turanga, furnished to us by Pataea. Motuhaha, Taranaki, Bth December, 1865. These are instructions respecting the head which is being sent to the places in the Island. The road extends direct from here to Waitotara, then it proceeds in an inland course to Pipiriki, thence direct to Taupo, thence direct to TTrewera, thence direct to Ngatiporou until it readies Hiriui tekani a Takirau, where it ends. Carry it properly ; let not this be performed in an improper manner, like as liangitauira improperly performed the other direction of mine to the places of (New Zealand) this island. So that it may reach Hiriui safely, let him give it to his European relatives at that place. Eead this letter at every place. If it should be spoiled in crossing a swamp, copy it upon a new piece of paper, so that it may get safely to some other places ; and so on till you get to Hiriui. That is all. M Na Te Ua Hatjmexe. COPY of a Lettee from Pataea to the European Eesidents at Turanga. (Written in English). Dear Fkiends, — Patutahi, 25th March, 18G5. Being informed that you are afraid of the Natives who have lately come here, i write you these few lines to inform you that you need not have the slightest of fear in your hearts for they do not intend you the slightest of harm. There is only one person implicated in the murder of the minster, and dare say you know his name, so you must not blame a whole flock because there is one scabby sheep in it. iam desired by the Natives to inform you that if to-morrow is a fine day they, the Natives, wish to see you all at eight o'clock precisely, do you not be afraid, but come boldly forward, for if there was the slightest Danger, i would be sure and warn you of it. so no more at present, But remains your friend, The Extelope. William Buttlee. [This letter is for all the Europeans at Turanga.] The above is a correct copy, spelling and all. He has made a mistake in the date, as it was written yesterday, March 22nd. March 23rd^ 1565. E. B. Clabke. No. 39. His Excellency the Goverxob to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Sib, —■ Government House, Auckland, 2nd May, 1565. I have the honor to enclose for your information a copy of a report from Mr. McLean, the Superintendent of the Province of Hawke's Bay, from which you will be glad to learn that affairs on the Eastern Coast of this island have recently assumed a more favourable aspect than they bore a short time since, and that there is now but little reason to apprehend disturbances in that jiart of the island. You will, I think, be especially gratified at finding how large and active a part the Native race have themselves taken in preserving the peace of the Eastern portion of the Northern Island. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure 1 to No. 39. Sib, — Napier, 25th April, 18G5. I am glad to be able to acquaint you that the state of Native affairs at Poverty Bay and the Wairoa has recently assumed a more favourable aspect than was generally anticijiated a few weeks ago. The " St. Kilda" arrived here from Poverty Bay on Sunday bringing the Eeverend S. Williams, Wi Tako, Matene te Whiwhi, and other Natives of the West Coast. Hirini te Kaui Otakirau, the principal chief of the East Coast, and other influential Natives have arrived here by the same opportunity. I enclose the copy of a letter from the Eeverend S. Williams, which details some of the efforts used by himself and the friendly Natives to resist the progress of the Pai Marire faith at Turanga ; and it is gratifying to be able to state that those efforts have been attended with so much success. I also enclose the copy of an address from the European settlers of Poverty Bay to Wi Tako and Matene te Whiwhi, expressive of their high appreciation of the important services rendered by those chiefs. I am quite aware that the Government will not fail to recognize those services in a substantive manner. I shall avail myself of the presence of Hirini, Matene, Wi Tako, and other chiefs to have a general meeting, at which measures will be proposed in concert with the friendly Natives to resist the insidious I

No. 59. Mr. McLean to Native Minister, Napier, 25th April 1365.

33

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5

encroachments of the Hau llau, and provide more fully for the security of the European inhabitants on the East Coast. The erection of a blockhouse, enrolment of volunteers, arming of the friendly Natives, and other measures adopted for the safety of the Wairoa, have been attended with the best possible resuli s. I enclose the copy of a letter from Mr. Locke, an intelligent officer, who possesses an intimate knowledge of the Natives ; together with one from the Resident Magistrate of the district, describing the action taken by Kopu, Ihaka Paora, and other chiefs with their followers, on the occasion of a late visit of from 300 to 400 of the Hau Hau. I cannot speak in too high terms of the undeviating loyalty and zeal of Kopu and Ihaka, to whose exertions the European inhabitants of the north end of the Province are indebted for being preserved from the outrage and violence of the numerous bands of fanatics that have frequented that part of the district. I regret that some of the chiefs are not proof against the fascinations of the Hau Hau belief. Te Matenga, of Nuhaka, who, a few weeks ago, declared emphatically against the Hau Haus, has now joined a party of them, under the pretence that his wife and other members of his family can be cured of all ailments by their incantations. It is evident from this and other eases of defection constantly occurring, notwithstanding the present more favourable aspect of affairs, that there cannot with safety be any relaxation in the adoption of measures for the defence of the inhabitants. I have, &c, Donald McLean. ■ The Hon. the Minister for Native Affairs, "Wellington. Enclosure 2 to No. 39. Slß,— Turanga, 20th April, 1865. I have the honor to inform you that the Hau Hau, which up to the 31st ultimo, were fast gaining ground, and only a week since were making use of very insolent and defiant language, have to say the least received a most decided check. Their arguments have been thoroughly confuted, and the falsehood of their statements with reference to the success of their party, as well as their unfounded claim to supernatural power, have been completely exposed. Kercopa had been so well received that he was expected at Makaraka in company with some of the Turanga. chiefs to have his likeness taken, when the news of our arrival induced him to keep in the background ; and after threatening to gratify his cannibal appetite upon "Wi Tako, as well as the clergy, he left the district on the sth instant, much discouraged and alarmed. Patara, who found it convenient to disclaim any connection with the Opotiki murder, and pretended to condemn Kereopa's proceedings, was using every means in his power to establish himself in the district, and to push his way to the Ngatiparou, at Waiapu, and the Eawakawa. The Taitanga-a-mahnki Hau Hau were determined in defiance of all that was said in opposition to bring Patara forward at the Waerengaanika runanga, but upon reaching the spot on the 10th instant, and finding that the friendly Natives would not meet him, they made use of most violent threats against all strangers and sympathisers with the Government, and then retired. Most of them returned on the following morning with Patara and the rest of the Taranaki party, and at the termination of the meeting it was evident that what had been said had made a decided impression, for there was a marked change in their tone and manner. Several of them have since left the Hau Hau among whom is Henare Ruru, one of their most influential men, who has openly denounced their proceedings. The manner in which they ran from Whakato, when challenged to draw the " Lady Bird" on shore ; their failure to get the " Eclipse" ashore at Opotiki, as well as the failure of the L'rewera and Wairoa party in attempting to draw the " St. Kilda" ashore at Whareongaonga, have been constantly cast in their teeth in not very complimentary language. Patara evidently found the ground breaking from under him, and he left Taureka on Sunday last for the Bay of Plenty. At the Whakato runanga the constant cry of the Natives was : i; Stop the war, or every corner of the island will soon be in arms." The reply was: How can you speak of peace, when you have been encouraging people in your district who are not only Hau Haus but murderers of innocent Europeans ? Had you apprehended these murderers upon their reaching this place, and handed them up to the authorities, you would have distinguished yourselves, and might have expected a hearing. The residents again said " stop the war and the Hau Hau will soon die out. It is only supported by sympathy for the people who are being slain, and for the land which is being taken from them. As for the murder let the Governor arrange that at Opotiki." To this it was replied: " You are putting the cart before the horse ; first give up the murderers and put down the Hau Hau, and then talk of peace." The extraordinary amount of suspicion which was exhibited by many towards everything that had been said or done by the English, and as to their ultimate intentions with regard to the Native race, was most painful to witness ; but the testimony borne by the Otaki and Ahuriri chiefs to the truth of the statement —that it was not the wish of the English to exterminate the Maoris and deprive them of their land; but that on the contrary, a very kindly feeling had all along been manifested towards them (murderers excluded) and that the Government would rejoice at the prospect of peace, if it could be secured on a satisfactory busis —appeared to have a very great effect in restoring confidence and allaying irritation of feeling. After considerable discussion it was arranged, that if the Hau Hau were expelled from the district, a general meeting should be called at Ahuriri, as being the most central spot to which the leaders of the tribes now in arms against the Government should be invited to discuss terms of peace. But when Eaharuhi Eukupo sided with the Hau Hau at the Waerengaahika runanga, and urged that if at the Ahuriri meeting the Government should decline to make peace, all the neutral tribes should take up arms and join the hostile ranks, the frjendly Natives declared that a meeting called with such an understanding would only be an insult to the Government, and therefore they would decline having anything to do with it. I cannot speak too highly of the valuable assistance which lias been rendered by Wi Tako, Matene

34

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OE NEW

vA.~No.-3.

to Whiwhi, and their party, who came up with mo in the " St. Kilda," in checking the advance of the Hail Han, and in keeping the peace of the district during the recent crisis ; for there is little doubt that but for their presence and the exertions they have made, Kereopa and Patara would by this time have had the whole district under their command. Wirihana Toatoa has carried weight as expressing the views of Ngatikahuugunu of Ahuriri, who he represents. These chiefs would 1 believe gladly have apprehended the murderers, but being unarmed themselves with very little chance of any real support from the resident Natives, whilst there was every certainty of the greater number of the Taitanga-a-Mahaki taking up arms in defence of the murderers, they were obliged to relinquish the idea. Since the departure of the Taranaki party I have visited Taureka and Patatahi, the head quarters of the Hau Hau, in company with Archdeacon AY. L. Williams and some of the friendly chiefs ; there we were treated with great civility. The people generally appeared ashamed of their late conduct, and from the way in which the jirincipal men expressed themselves, I am led to the conclusion that their attachment to the Hau Hau religion is not very deeply rooted ; but that on the contrary its influence is already declining. From these considerations 1 am encouraged to hope that there need be no apprehension of any immediate disturbance in this district. It is only just to state that there were some of the Taitanga-a-Mahaki tribe who were deeply grieved at the conduct of their own people, and who would, I believe, have been ready if it had been necessary to risk their own lives in defence of the Bishop and his family. In conclusion, I would remark that the fact of the Bishop having left the district as he did, under such trying circumstances, had a most salutary effect in inducing the Natives to reconsider the position in which they were placing themselves, and was a powerful lever in the hands of those who were trying to expel the murderers from the district, and to put down the Hau Haus. I have, &c., His Honor the Superintendent, Napier. Samuel Willtams. Enclosure 3 to No. 39. To Wi Tako, Matcne to Whiwhi, and their companions, — (xextlemex, —We wish to express to you our grateful sense of the important services which you have rendered to this district during the three weeks of your stay in it. Notwithstanding that your own lives have been threatened, you have done your utmost to strengthen the hands of tliose who have been exerting themselves to save this district from those troubles which seemed to be coming like a flood upon it, and under the Divine blessing your efforts have been so far successful, that the influence of the Hau Hau party lias very considerably diminished since the time of your arrival; and Patara and Kereopa have both left the district with their followers, having been unable to stand their ground against the opposition which has been brought to bear against them and their pernicious doctrines. May God preserve your own district from those troubles which you have shewn yourselves so solicitous to avert from this. W. L. Williams, J. W. Harris, James Dunlop, John Harvey, Nathan Stafford, W. Smith, E. H. Wren, H. J. Wren, J. G. Steady, John Tye, James Smith, James Maekv, E. Espie, D. Mcllroy, John Ton, E Espie, Alexander Eobb, James Wilson, G-. E. Bead, T. E. Bloomfield, B. Read. John Edwards, A. Keinpthorne, Poverty Bay, 20.h April, 1865. Enclosure 4 to No. 39. S. Locke, Esq., to His Honor the Supeiuntexdext, Napier. Sir,— Wairoa, 20th April, 1865. I beg to forward enclosed, a report of a Native meeting held at the Uhi Pa, on the Wairqa, on Monday, 17th, and Tuesday, 18th ; also the speeches of both parties on the occasion ; also a letter from Kopu containing the speeches, &c, for publication in the Waka Maori. The Hau Hau party, at the time of their leaving Turanga, it appears, did not muster many followers ; the majority of those who caused the disturbance at Tauranga either stopping behind or returning to Opotiki by another route. This party is led by a man called Bonaparte (their prophet) and another, Namea Watene, formerly a minister on the Waikato, who seems to be the cleverest man in their party. These two men, with a few followers, stayed for a time at Maraetaka to gain followers; from thence "they marched to the Mahia and Nukutauwa, where they stopped for some days, going through their ceremonies, (which they laugh at themselves,) and recruiting followers. From what I can at present ascertain, they did not succeed in gaining many immediate followers there, but they have succeeded in upsetting the Native mind in that district, and in disorganizing all the hapus, so that the lowest rogue is looked upon as the cleverest man. They then proceeded to Nuhaka, where they were met by Ihaka Whanga and his' followers, who withstood all temptations. Too much praise cannot be bestowed on Ihaka for the manner in which he resisted these people and defeated all their arguments ; but they succeeded in gaining over Matinga lukareahc, who has since been one of their principal advisers, and now wishes them to leave some Tius (Jews) in this district to teach the people. On leaving Nuhaka, they proceeded to Wakaki, where they were joined by the Waru, and all the inland Natives, and on Monday, 17th, arrived at the Wairoa, to the number of about three to four hundred. Early on Monday morning I proceeded, with Kopu, to visit the different chiefs on the river, aad to make arrangements for meeting the Hau Hau (I am what I am). About nine o'clock the friendly

35

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

*.—No. 5.

Natives collected at tlie pa of Paora Apatu, when it was arranged that the friendly Natives should march to the Uni, all armed, and that the Europeans should all stop on the right bank of the river, near the stockade, but that there should be no unnecessary show ; all of which plans were carried out ; but on arriving at the Uhi Pa, and waiting for some time, the Natives returned to Paora Apatu's Pa, first setting a guard on both sides of the river. The nest morning, 18th, the friendly Natives again collected, numbering about one hundred and fifty, under arms, but many more were in readiness should ■ necessity require. We marched up to near the flagstaff. The friendly chiefs present were Kopu, Paora Apatu, Hamana Tupaea, Maehe Kaunoana, Haparoua, Kohe, and others. Hamana commenced by making a speech. lie was followed by Maehe and others ; Kopu spoke at great length. lam -sorry to say that I have not been able to collect all his speech. As it is with Ihaka Whanga at the Mania, so with Kopu here, for it is owing to their staunch loyalty and known bravery that keeps together the Natives of this district. Nothing has yet transpired that would lead me to suppose that there is any immediate likelihood '■of an outbreak here at present; but at the same time I cannot too strongly recommend precaution, for although the Han Hau are compelled to leave here, some of them intend stopping at■ "Wakaki, and others^at the Waui Pa; and it is more their underhand cunning and dissimulation that requires guarding against than their open hostility at present; and at the same time I would state that if the •Government had not taken the precautions they have done in this district, by arming a few of the loyal Natives, and sending up the stockade and volunteers so as to show a bold and determined front, that I should not be now able to make such a favourable report. There has been a small Native Police force organized, of ten men, to perform duty as long as the enemy are in the district, which I hope will meet with your approval. I have, &c, His Honor Donald McLean, Napier, Saml. Locke. Enclosure 5 to Xo. 39. Sib,— Wairoa, 20th April, 18G5. I have the honor to report for your information that a large body of the Pai Marires, consisting of about four hundred, arrived here on Monday last. lam unable to give a detailed report •of their proceedings, as I was unfortunately away at Moliaka on the day in question ; but Mr. Locke, who was present, has sent in a report of the speeches, &c, &c. I am happy to say that owing to the precautions taken by the Government in arming the friendly "Natives, and in sending up a blockhouse, together with the determined stand made by Te Kopu, and indeed nearly all the Natives of this place, the whole affair went off very quietly. I beg to remark here that too much praise cannot be given to Te Kopu for his conduct on this occasion. Paora te Apatu was also very staunch. The Hau Hau propose starling to day for Matiti, and from thence home by the inland route ; they intend leaving a few at the settlements on their way, to get converts, but I am inclined to think they -will be unsuccessful; particularly if the loyal Natives are kept together, which may be done by ■enrolling them in some simple way as a sort of Volunteer Native Force. They appear to be very -anxious to learn the drill. They have a few young men among them who, with a little instruction from the Sergeant of the Defence Force would be quite capable of teaching them in a very short time -and would be the means of keeping them together to a certain extent. I am sorry to say that Te Matinga, with his followers, have joined the Hau Haus ; but I have, written to Ihaka to get all the muskets returned. I believe there will be no difficulty in the matter, .-and as you are aware that Te Matinga was never much liked or respected by the Natives here, verylittle harm will be done by his disaffection. I have been obliged to employ labour in digging a trench round the blockhouse, and have also taken on ten Maoris as a night patrol for a few days. I have, &c, His Honor Donald McLean, Napier. S. Deighton, E.M. No. 40. His Excellency the Governor to the Right Hon. the Secretary op State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 7th May, 1565. I have the honor to transmit for your information a copy of a letter addressed to you by Mr. FitzGerald on the 15th ultimo in relation to my Despatches, No. 41 of the 4th, and 46 of the 7th of April last, as also the copy of a letter which Mr. FitzGerald has addressed to the Colonial Secretary on the same subject, expressing his regret that he cannot unsay or modify any of the statements contained in a letter he addressed to Mr. Adderley. 2. I have nothing to add to the statements made in the Despatches to which Mr. FitzGerald refers. lam quite satisfied that the case should now rest on its merits, and believe that ultimately Mr. FitzGerald will deeply regret the course he has in this instance pursued, evidently under the influence of prejudice ; but I wish to correct a few additional mis-statements he has made which might mislead you. 3. Mr. FitzGerald is wrong in saying that the letter from the AVaikato chiefs which led to the murder of two officers and six men of our forces at Tataraimaka in no way emanated from the Lower iWaikato people. It was signed in their behalf by Herewina, a Lower AVaikato chief, who lived within a few miles of oair out-settlements. 4. Mr. FitzGerald is wrong in saying I did not see fit to publish a letter of mine to the Natives until a year after it was written. I have nothing to do with the publication of my letters. This is done by my Eesponsible Advisers, in their own way and at their own time. It is a matter regarding which I have exercised no control whatever. 5. Mr. FitzGerald is wrong in stating that Mr. Domett was the Minister who advised me to erect a court house and police station at the Kohekohe. This advice was tendered to me before Mr. Domett, took office, and he -could have known no more of the subject than Mr. FitzGerald did.

No. 60. Ilr. FitzGerald to Secretary of State, 15th April, 1865, Mr. FitzGerald to Colonial Secretary 17th April, 1865"

36

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5.

6. Regarding the size of the buildings to be erected at the Kohekohe, I knew nothing. I believe that I never saw the design for those buildings until it was shown to me the other day at "Wellington, when I was writing my recent Despatch on this subject to you. 7. Mr. Fitz Gerald has also apparently forgotten that when it was originally intended to erect a court house at Kohekohe, the King Natives of the "Waikato district declared that they would not allow such a building to be erected, and that they stated this originally without any reference to its size. 8. Mr. FitzGerald has not quoted correctly Mr. Dillon Bell's letter to Matutaera. That letter does not state, as Mr. FitzGerald alleges, that the building was intended for a schoolroom. The words are —" a quantity of timber which had been sent up for a school and other buildings." It was shown in my previous Despatch that the building was originally designed for a court house; that then, for the reasons I have stated, the Government added a police station to it; and how the Government finally determined to add a schoolroom to every police station, for the benefit of the Natives it intended to employ in the police force. 9. In transmitting Mr. Bell's letter to Matutaera in my Despatch to the Secretary of State of the 30th of March, 1863,1 did not read that letter with a very critical eye ; nor did the idea ever enter into my mind that it would be possible to put such an interpretation on the acts of the Government as it has now been attempted to put upon them, or I should certainly have made a full explanation on the subject, instead of forwarding Mr. Bell's letter without comment. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure 1 to No. 40. J. E. FitzGeeald, Esq., to the Eight Hon. E. Cabdwell. Sic, — Christchurch, New Zealand, 15th April, 1865. I have this morning, a few hours before the departure of the English mail, which sails to-day, received by command of His Excellency Sir George Grey a copy of two Despatches, dated the 4th and 7th instant respectively, which His Excellency has addressed to you, charging me with having stated what was not true in a letter which I wrote to Mr. Adderley, dated 14th November, 1864, and which was published in the Times newspaper. I have the honor to enclose a copy of Mr. "Weld's letter to myself, by which you will perceive that His Excellency calls on me to substantiate or withdraw the charges I have made, and at the same time forbids me to publish His Excellency's Despatches without his express sanction. The only course therefore open to me is at once, notwithstanding the shortness of>the time allowed me, to address yourself, in order that I may not remain, even for one month, under the imputation of having mis-stated facts. In the Despatch of the 4th instant, His Excellency says " that it is absolutely and wholly untrue that, after obtaining permission to erect a school room or court house at Kohekohe, he caused a plan to be made of a redoubt for the reception of troops." I am prepared to establish upon oath, before any tribunal Her Majesty's Government may choose, every word of the statement I have made. 1. The intention to erect a court house is admitted and proved by the several enclosures in His Excellency's Despatch No. 41, of the 4th of April, 1565. 2. That the building was also intended for a school is proved by a letter from the Hon. F. Dillon Bell to Matutaera, printed on page 17, E. No. 3, section 1, of the Appendix to the Journals of the House of Eepresentatives for 1863. As this letter states that the building was intended for a schoolroom, as it was written by the Minister for Native Affairs, and was enclosed by His Excellency to the Colonial Minister in a Despatch dated 30th March, 1863, I may be pardoned for assuming that it states what is true. 3. That the building was not really a court house or a schoolroom is also substantially proved by His Excellency's own statement in the Despatch under consideration. Ho says—" On the 28th June, 1862,1 was advised in the manner then usual that a barrack for the accommodation of a Native Police Force should be added to the court houso which was about to be built;" and in the Memorandum dated 28th of June, 1862, the last enclosure in the Despatch under notice, His Excellency says—" I think it is of the utmost importance that every effort should be made to obtain every position we can on the "Waikato Eiver." It must be admitted that this language points to something very different from a school or court house. As to the view taken by the Natives, I beg to refer you to Enclosure 6 to No. 11, p. 18, E. No. 2, section 1, on the Appendix before quoted. It there appears that when Ihaka and Mohe rowed past and saw the timber prepared for the building, which they had thought was to be a small building, they said " No, it is death to the nation;" meaning that it was not timber for a court house, but large heavy bulk for a formidable military post. I assert, and am prepared to prove, that such was the character of the building attempted to bo erected, and that it was the magnitude of the timber and the obvious and unexpected character of the building which alarmed the Natives, and induced them to resist its erection. I therefore respectfully submit that my statements on this head were perfectly accurate. His Excellency is also pleased to complain that I did not bring this subject before the Assembly in 18G4, which occurred after I had written my letter to Mr. Adderley. I reply, that in the very first speech which I made in the House of Eepresentatives in 1863, I did distinctly state the whole story, challenging its denial in the presence of Mr. Domett and Mr. Bell, the Advisers of His Excellency when the event occurred, and in the presence of the then Ministers who had just taken office, and that though it occasioned much talk out of the House, it never received, either in or out of the House, any denial whatever. It was then not very likely I should call, in 1864, for an inquiry into a fact which was allowed to pass unchallenged by two Ministries in 1863, —especially as the Session of 1864 was a X

37

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5

very brief and exceptional one, in -which all subjects of dispute were avoided, in order to enable His Excellency to extricate himself from the embarrassment in which his collision with Mr. Whitaker's Government had involved himself and the Colony. I now come to His Excellency's Despatch of the 7th of April, in which His Excellency asserts that every one of the important statements in my letter to Mr. Adderley, as to the breach of faith with the "Natives at Ngaruawahia " are wholly and absolutely untrue." I will first assert, in reply to this, that I am prepared to prove, by Native evidence, that the conduct of the Governor was considered to be a breach of faith. It is exceedingly difficult for me, at an hour's notice, to make out from the large volumes of papers the published evidence on this point. I particularly, however, beg to call attention to William Thompson's letter to Bishop Pompallier, published on page 88, E. No. 2, of the Appendix for 1864. It is quite clear that after Bangiriri the Natives were thoroughly broken, and prepared for submission and peace, and I have received much information which leaves no doubt on my mind on this subject. As regards Sir George Grey's assertion that he did write to Pene Pukewhau after the army had got to Ngaruawahia, I beg to point out that the letter to which His Excellency refers was published for the first time in the Appendix for 186-1, some weeks after my letter. It was not included in the papers for 1863, the only information open to the public when I wrote to Mr. Adderley. My statements were based on the published documents in E. No. sd, pages 5-8 ; and I am sure you will perceive that the inference I drew was a fair and natural one. But I assert that Sir George Grey did regard his letter of the 6th December, 1863. as involving an engagement to meet the chiefs at Ngaruawahia, for he was on the point of starting for that place. The reasons why he did not go arc stated in a note appended to No. 6, page 3, E. 2, Appendix for 1864. The broad fact remains, which I believe to be unquestionable, that the Natives were fully prepared to come to terms at that time ; that a satisfactory peace might have been made, but that the steps which would have led to it were abandoned, owing to a miserable squabble between His Excellency and his Ministers—to which, therefore, may be attributed all the loss of life and of treasure since that time. Lastly, with regard to the promised inquiry into the Waitara question, Sir George Grey says that he tried all he could to get the Natives to agree to that inquiry. I reply, he had promised to make that inquiry himself, and he did not make it for eighteen months. The moment he did make it, he found that further inquiry was unnecessary, and he gave up the Waitara at once. Had his Excellency made that inquiry eighteen months before, he would probably have taken the same course. I entirely agree with His Excellency that Englishmen will not sit quietly down and see other persons in possession of their homes ; and it may be that their compulsory acquiescence in that wrong, during eighteen months, in which they received no single word of sympathy or sign of assistance from the Governor, may account for the deeply seated distrust of His Excellency which characterises the European population of Taranaki. There is not the slightest doubt that, had the Waitara question been honestly grappled at once, the restitution of Tataraimaka would have followed, and that, in the view of a Governor who had expressed such strong opinions as to the cruel wrongs done at Waitara, whose language, if it meant anything, fully justified the resistance, of the Native tribes to that act of aggression, the settlement of the Waitara question was the sine qua non of peace ; certain it is, that William Thompson and the chiefs of Waikato offered to go down to Taranaki and effect the restitution of Tataraimaka by peaceful means, and the Governor deliberately refused their oft'er. But it is no part of my present object to intrude my own views upon Her Majesty's Government. I wrote to Mr. Adderley in order to disabuse the minds of the English of the idea that His Excellency Sir George Grey was standing between the Natives and the rapacity of the Colonists. Amidst all that the Colonists have suffered, nothing is more galling than to see a great and ill-deserved reputation for humanity erected at their expense. AVhen the Colonists are once left with the power to act under their Constitution, and are charged with the pecuniary liabilities of their own acts, it will be evident that war has not been their policy, and that when it has seemed to be so, it was only under the sore temptation offered by a struggle in which the acquisition of land and the extension of commerce were paid for by the lives of English soldiers and the money of English taxpayers ; such has been the policy of the present Governor of New Zealand. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. James Edwaed FitzGerald. Enclosure 2 to No. 40. J. E. FitzGebald, Esq., to the Hon. the Colonial Secbetaby. Sib,— Christchurch, 17th April, 1865. I beg to acknowledge the receipt of your letter enclosing, by command of His Excellency, a copy of two Despatches with enclosures, which His Excellency has addressed to the Secretary of State, in order that I may have the opportunity of substantiating or recalling certain statements made by me in a letter to Mr. Adderley, which His Excellency considers to be untrue. I shall be obliged if you will carry to His Excellency the Governor my grateful thanks for the opportunity he has afforded me of seeing those Despatches, and my sincere regret that I am unable to unsay or modify any of the statements contained in my letter to Mr. Adderley. As it was clearly impossible for me to remain under the imputation of having stated what was untrue, I addressed a letter to the Secretary of State, a copy of which I enclose for His Excellency's information. Sir George Grey only does me justice in saying that he has no intention of imputing to me any intention of purposely perverting the truth. I have only stated facts as they appear to me from information on which at present I rely, and it is a matter of extreme regret to mo that nothing contained in the Despatches of which copies have been forwarded to me appears to require me to alter the views I had formed as to the facts referred to in my letter to Mr. Adderley. The one statement in my letter, that "no communication" was made to the Natives after Rangiriri which was inaccurate, I cannot help, because His Excellency had not seen fit to publish the

38

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5.

letter for a year after it was written ; but as that letter was substantially " no communication " in the sense in which I was speaking, and was so regarded by the Natives, my statement waa substantially though not literally true. I have, &c, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary. James Edwaed FitzGebald. No. 41. His Excellency the Goyebnoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaex of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, Bth May, 1865. I regret that Sir D. Cameron is under the impression that myself and the Colonial Ministers were doing something unfair to him behind his back, whilst he was engaged in operations in the field, and that he should have forwarded, as he informs me he has done, such a statement for the information of Her Majesty's Government. 2. In order that you may have before you full information on this subject, should any further question arise regarding it, I have the honor to transmit copies of the papers named in the margin. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 42. His Excellency the Goveenoe to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 10th May, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information the copy of a statement made by To Aporo, a Native who was charged to deliver to me a message from Eewi, who has hitherto been the chief leader of the rebels. This statement was made on the 24th ultimo. lat the same time transmit the copy of a letter from the Native teacher at Ahuahu which fully confirms the statement made by Te Aporo. 2. You will be glad to find from the papers that there is little doubt that Eewi now intends to make his submission to the Government, an event which must have a great effect for good in this country. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 43. His Excellency the Govebnoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetabt op State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 26th May, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information copies of two confidential reports which have been received from Colonel "Warre, C.8., from which you will be glad to see that by two skilful and rapidly executed movements he has occupied two most important positions to the north and south of Taranaki, has placed that Province in a state of security, and has in point of fact I believe brought the war in that Province to a close. 2. The post he has occupied to tho south of New Plymouth is fifty miles distant from it, nearly half-way to "Wanganui, and within about fifteen miles of the point to which Sir D. Cameron advanced. A remarkable illustration is thus aftbrded of the correctness of my conclusions as to the sufficiency of the force in the country easily to connect the settlements of Taranaki and "Wanganui, as you will find that Colonel "Warre states that he was not only able to establish the two important posts I have named, but has also opened his overland communication with them without experiencing any opposition or any difficulty of any kind. 3. You will further find that Colonel Warre states, in reference to the country to the north of the Waitara and between that river and tho "White Cliffs, that the whole number of rebel Natives in that neighbourhood is very small; whilst to the south of Taranaki,.at "Warea, their main place, he states that the number of rebel Natives cannot exceed forty or fifty fighting men. I could not therefore have asked for reinforcements of several thousand men, in addition to the ten thousand regular troops now in the country, and to the local forces, to encounter such an enemy. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 44. His Excellency the Goteenoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 23rd May, 1865. I have the honor to transmit, for the purpose of being laid before the Queen, a numerouslysigned petition from the Natives of Hokianga, praying that Her Majesty will not allow the place of residence of the Governor to be moved from Auckland to the South of New Zealand. I hare, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure to No. 44. To the QrEEN, — This is the voice of the Maori people living at Hokianga, in New Zealand, praying to you, O Queen, — "We have heard that fault has been found with the old place of residence of the Governor and the Government at Auckland, and that they are to be remoyed to the South.

No. 61. Vide A. NO8.1&2. Sir D. Cameron to Sir &. Grey, 3rd May, 1865. Memorandum by the Governor, 4th March, 1865. Memorandum by Ministers, 20th March, 1865. Memorandum by the Governor, Ist April, 1865. Memorandum by Ministers, Bth May, 1865. No. 63. Vide Enclosure 1 to Ko. 47, p. 49.

No. 67. Colonel Warre to D. Q.M.G., New Plymouth, 27th April, 1865. Ditto 13th May.

No. 71. Enclosed.

39

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OE STATE.

A.—No. 5.

"We think this to be wrong. Listen, 0 Queen, to our word; it is the salvation of this island that they are taking elsewhere. There are two races of men living on this Island, the Maori people one, the white people the other. The Governor and the Government standing in the midst, looking after both races, protects them. We think that if the Governor leaves us, great confusion will be the consequence. This is the reason of our prayer to you, 0 Queen, to confirm the dwelling of the Governor at Auckland, at the place which is near to all the Maori tribes. This is our prayer to you from the people who have adhered to you in the tempest and in the sunshine, i.e., who are loyal in war and in peace. (Here follow the names of one hundred and fifty-two Natives, including forty chiefs.) We, the persons who have written our names to this paper, do truly wish that the Government of New Zealand be kept at Auckland, that they may plainly see to the helm and head —that is to say — the evil of the Island. No. 45. His Excellency the Govebnoe to the Eight Hon. the Secbetaet or State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 23rd May, 1865. "With a view of confirming in their allegiance the Natives of the East Coast who had been visited by the fanatics who had murdered Mr. Volkner, I requested Captain Luce, at present senior naval officer here, to proceed to that part of New Zealand, there to visit the principal friendly chiefs. 2. Captain Luce ia an officer of considerable ability, and of great discretion. I therefore anticipated that important results would follow from his visit. In this expectation I have not been mistaken, as you will find from the enclosed copy of his report of proceedings that great good has been effected by his visit to the friendly chiefs of the East Coast. 3. Since his return, Her Majesty's ship " Eclipse," commanded by Captain Fremantle, has been despatched to call at Opotiki, and some places in its neighbourhood. I trust that by this mail I shall be able to transmit to you Captain Premantle's report of his proceedings. I have, Ac, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure 1 to No. 45. Eepoet of Proceedings of Captain Luce, during the Cruise to the East Cape, between the 2Gth April and the 11th May, 1865. Sic,— Her Majesty's Ship " Esk," in Auckland Harbour, 11th May, 1865. I have the honor to report that, in compliance with your requisition of the 25th April, I have visited in H.M. Ship " Esk" Te Kaha, Hick's Bay, Kawa Kawa, Waiapu, and Poverty Bay, and at each of these places I held communication with those chiefs and tribes who were willing to see me. I was well received on all occasions. I everywhere delivered aa your message the instructions you gave me, to " Encourage the tribes in every way in my power to remain faithful to their religion, and to the cause of law and order." While I praised the loyal and faithful, I warned the Kingites and Pai Marires that no act of violence would long go unpunished. I advised them, above all things, to remain quiet and peaceable, and told them that as long as they behaved well, they would not be interfered with, and that I believed peace and quiet would soon open their eyes, and bring many of them back to their flag and their church. I told all, that I came from you, and that I would patiently listen, and report to you all I saw and heard. I also delivered your letter to the chief Morgan, and the Bishop's letter to the people of Poverty Bay. I believe this visit of a man-of-war, with a message from you to the East Coast Natives, has had a very good effect. The loyal and faithful feel themselves strengthened and encouraged, while the King party and Pai Marires who lately have in some places closed the roads, and shown marked incivility to loyal Natives and English travellers, changed their tone directly our being on the coast was known to them, and not only opened the roads, but also invited into their pas myself and those who were on their way to see me. I held koreros at Te Kaha, Hick's Bay, Kawa Kawa, Waiapu, and Poverty Bay. The chief Morgan came to me at Hick's Bay, and I accompanied him overland to his place. He and two of his chiefs embarked with me at Warariki Point and accompanied me to Poverty Bay, and at his earnest request I brought to Auckland the chief Wickliff of East Cape, and Hotene of Waiapu Valley. The summary of what 1 heard at the different places is as follows : — At Te Kaha : I ascertained, beyond a doubt, that Mr. T. A. White had left that place in the " Kate Williams," on the 21st or 22nd March. I met a friendly chief, Hamiora Eewiti, who showed me a paper signed by Mr. White, and dated 21st March, certifying that the bearer was a loyal chief of Omaio. An English resident, named Smith, saw him embark in the schooner, and told me that she sailed with a full cargo, that all her dealings with the Natives were of a friendly character, and that they had fine weather at Te Kaha for three days after she left. The Pai Marires have visited this place, and converted most of the Natives to the new religion. They said, in reply to my advice to remain quiet and peaceable, that only one crime had been committed in the Bay of Plenty, and they had taken no part in it, and would remain quiet. The old people profess not to have changed their religion, but say that the young and the women take to it eagerly. A party of Pai Marires were expected there in a day or two. Two chiefs, Te Kepa Tamarangi and Hori Kerei Kawakura, relatives of Mr. Fulloon, came on board with us, and consulted with Mr. Fulloon about the practicability of raising a contingent of friendly Maoris from amongst the tribes. There are not above 60 men at Te Kaha. At Rich's Bay: I visited the chief Harara Houkamau. His pa is small, scarcely containing above 30 men. He said

No. 72. Cnyit. Luce to Sir a.arey,lltliMar, 1865. "_ Sir G. O-rey to Capt. Luce" 18th May, 1865.

40

DESPATCHES PROM THE GOVERNOR OP NEW

A—No. 5

that, though frequently pressed to receive Pai Marires and Kingites, ho had not done so, and would not. He complained that he was none the better for his faithfulness, and said that he had not arms and ammunition enough to shoot a brace of pigeons for his guests. The clergyman from Kawa Kawa now lives at Houkamau's pa under his protection. The Kawa Kawa people, he told me, gave him much trouble, and he thought it best to leave them for a time. Tour letter to Morgan was forwarded from here, with one from Mr. Fulloon, asking him, in my name, to come to me. Though the chief promises not to admit the Pai Marires, I observed a great curiosity among his people to see what the religion was like. At Kawa Kawa : The chief Hona and most of his people met us on the beach. There were not above 30 or 40 men present, but many women and children. The chief said that ho and his people had remained firm and quiet, and would continue so. They want, he and the other speakers said, another Magistrate, and arms to defend themselves; and they also wanted to receive a visit from your Excellency, who they had never seen. I believe there are several Kingites in the pa, and I was told that the King's flag often flies from the flagstaff. The chief returned on board with me, and that afternoon I entertained a large number of Maoris, including several chiefs, and Morgan, who .arrived about sunset. All parts of the ship were free to them ; they saw our arms, and we fired at a mark, &c. ; they left astonished and delighted. Morgan and his clergyman Moses were my guests for the night. ¥c slept at Kawa Kawa the next night (Sunday), and started for Waiapu at daylight on Monday, Ist May, and arrived there the same afternoon ; several chiefs and others accompanied us. At Waiapu: There were not so many Natives present at the meeting as Morgan had expected. Some of the small tribes had been persuaded that if they did not attend, I should go to them, and they did not like Morgan to receive all the honor. There is no doubt of the complete loyalty of Morgan and his people ; but there are many Kingites in tho immediate neighbourhood, and we could see the King's flag flying during my stay at two pas inland. The constantly repeated cry of Morgan's people was :" We are surrounded by dangers ; we want arms and ammunition to defend ourselves ; we want another Magistrate in the room of Mr. White; and we want some soldiers or settlers. At Poverty Bay: I arrived here on the 3rd May, and arranged with Archdeacon Williams for a meeting to be held at Whakako the following day. The principal chief, Kaniatohorau, was absent at Napier; but the Bishop's letter was opened and read by his people. There were about 100 men at the korero. All professed to desire to remain quiet; some declared themselves to be loyal; the majority said they wore neutral. Some of the neutral said that in case of war they would side with the Government. Two acknowledged that they were Pai Marires, but said they had no wish to break the peace. Several wished a visit from your Excellency ; a few said they did not object to your coming, but thought no good would result. Some blamed the Bishop as the cause of the coming of the Pai Marires, and said he need not have left them. Many said they wished him back again ; but some of these said the time was not yet ripe for his return. Morgan and Wickliff spoke out boldly, and were sometimes interrupted. It was reported to me that the deserter Brown (late 57th Eegiment), who has been travelling about the country with the Pai Marires, had escaped from them and was working for a settler named Skyrme; I thought it very desirable that this man should be apprehended. Mr. Fulloon willingly undertook to try to capture him; ha took his measures promptly and effectively; the man was taken into custody by Mr. Fulloon, who brought him on board within four hours of my having desired his capture. Archdeacon Williams informed me that Butler had returned to Opotiki, but that about three days since ho had sent a message to tho Poverty Bay Pai Marires, desiring them to sow potatoes, &c, on the adjacent hills, so that provisions may be ready for him when he revisits them. Butler advises the people to remain quiet as long as they are not interfered with, but they are to send to him and he will immediately come to their assistance if the Pakehas give them trouble. The Maoris wherever I have visited them, appear to be living in a state of unhealthy excitement. The settlers complain that trade is slack and very little doing, but I do not think that their lives or property are in any danger. All tho tribes I saw, speak very highly of Mr. White and regret his loss. Many even of the King party brought their disputes for him to decide, and all wish a good man may be sent to fill his place. In conclusion, I have pleasure in acknowledging the valuable assistance I have received from Mr. Fulloon, his presence was extremely useful, not only as a zealous and obliging interpreter, but also because he was able to explain to the Maoris what has been done in other parts of the Island, and to talk to and advise with them in a friendly and unofficial manner. I have, &c, Sir George Grey, X.C.8., Auckland. J. P. LrcE, Captain. Notes by Mr. James Ftilloon, Interpreter, respecting the Cruise of the "Esk" to the East Cape. 28th April, 18G5. Captain Luce landed at Karetonia, and saw the old chief Iharoira Te Houkamou, who spoko to the following effect:—"Welcome, welcome, my friend the Pakeha. Welcome to Wharu Kahika. Welcome to your place. Steamers frequently come in here, but you arc the first to come in a man-of-war to see me: Welcome. I am living here quietly and without thought. I have remained quietly from the first. They have tried to make me a Kingite without success, now they are trying to convert me to the Hau Hau fanaticism with the same result. I have forbidden them to pass through my territories; they will not come past Cape Eunaway (Tirirau). They (the Hau Haus under Patara) are going to wait there, for the Ngatiporous to go and see them. I do not think they will go to see them: I have forbidden them to do so. They are constantly threatening vs —they say they will clear us off. Look at me, —I have no arms, nor have I legs; if they do come we have nothing to defend L

41

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OE STATE.

3L— No. 5

ourselves with. "Why don't the Governor give us some arms and ammunition to protect ourselves with, or is he waiting to hear that we have all been killed? Trouble and danger is on every side of us. I did not think so much of it before, but since the murder of Mr. Volkner I am dark, I cannot tell what will happen. This is my word to the Governor, —Send me arms and ammunition to defend myself with, I have remained true and faithful from the beginning, and yet what have I got for it, —am I any better off than the others: Why has not the Governor been to see me? He passes and repasses here without his ever calling in to see us, his children. Send us arms, &c, we have not any. See, the trees are full of pigeons, and yet I cannot shoot any of them for you, my guests. "Welcome to "Wharekahika. Welcome to this place. There are some King Natives on the other side, go and drive them away— drive them away from their place. It is they who are constantly threatening us. Even now they are in fear that you have come here. If you were to go over there, they would be very civil, because they are frightened of you. Be strong and sure, lest they the weaker be stronger than you the powerful." Te Houkamou then handed a letter which he had received that morning from Te Matinga, of Te Kaha, jespecting the Hau Haus, for the Governor's information. Captain Luce then addressed them. 29th April, 1865. . Captain Luce went over to Te Ivawa Kawa, and saw Hohua Tawhaki and his people. Hohua Tawhaki:—-"Welcome, Captain Luce and Mr. Fulloon. Welcome, and sec your people. Welcome. AV'o are glad that you have come to see us. We are in great fear. We have been and are constantly being threatened by the King Natives; they are constantly saying that they will cut us off. It is not a new word of theirs. There is a great number of us: There is Te Houkamau's party, there is mine, and there is Te Mokena's, altogether we have five hundred men; but we have no arms, that is, there are some that have guns and powder, but no one has caps (percussion) ; that is our great want. If we had only some caps, then we would be easy. Welcome ; we have applied over and over again for arms, and we will persist until we get it. We sent a great many letters to the Governor by Mr. White, asking for arms and ammunition ; but I suppose they have gone with him. The fault is Mr. Rico's; he promised to call here for him in the steamer (H.M.S. " Eclipse"). If he had done so, Mr. White would not be lost; we would not have lost our good friend :he was the man that we liked. Hearken ! This is my word : let the Governor send us another man soon ; let him send us a good man. Friend, send us the arms and ammunition, that we may cease to dread these fellows that are constantly threatening us. We are dark, because of the Opotiki murder. We do not know what they will do, as they have begun to murder. Go to Opotiki and punish those murderers ;do not spare them. Tell the Governor to close his love for the Natives. It is a waste of time and of sympathy; they do not deserve it. Punish them ; punish them severely, until they cry —then show them pity. There arc some King's Natives here —they have been impudent, and have threatened us ; but since you have come, they are afraid, and are civil. They are now very civil, because the man-of-war has come here ; very little would cause them to run away. You will see them to-morrow —they have three pas. They are a bad lot; they have forbidden us to pa?s along the coast; we can only do so when there are a large party of us : I wish them to bo sent away. Welcome, Captain ; welcome, stranger from afar! I have a request to make. I want a flag (English Jack) for my pa, that people may see and know that lam living under the Queen's laws; that the people may see that they are under the Queen's flag. AVill you ask the Governor for one, and he will send it to me? Welcome." Two or three others then spoke to the same effect as Hohua, and then Captain Luce addressed the meeting. James Fulloof. Monday, Ist May, 1865. Captain Luce, with Hohua, Te Mokena, and a large party of Natives, started early in the morning from Te Kawa Kawa for Te Mokena's place, Wainpu. On the coast we passed three or four settlements of King Natives, who were very civil to us, and even asked us to stay and have something to eat before we proceeded on our way, which somewhat surprised our party, as they say the King Natives never before invited them to stay and have some refreshment. They attributed it to the fact of the man-of-war coming on the coast. One old chief was particularly civil, named Paora Pokaia, at Torokaka (Te Tupaca o Eangokako). He bid us welcome and see the coast and people. He was very sorry that ■ there was trouble in the country, but he said it was not the Governor's fault, —the Governor never sought for it amongst them; they (the Natives) sought it, and they got their reward ; he had no pity on them. This old man had lost fifteen men at Tauranga, and was very desirous of joining the ■ Government side. However, wo did not stay, but pushed on to Te Wikiriwhio, where we had a late breakfast, after which we proceeded on our way to Waiapu, where we arrived in the afternoon, and were received with war dancing, &c. In the evening the Eunanga came and had a korero. Aperahama Patutahi: " Welcome, &c. There is only one thing that we desire and we are anxious for, and that is arms and ammunition. We require it for our protection and for self-defence ; we have no other desire. My reason for asking is, that we arc surrounded by danger—danger is on every side of us. I first applied to Mr. Baker, then to Mr. White, and now I apply to you. Our letters have gone with Mr. White. Comply with our request." Eihari Paipa: "I am surrounded by danger, and have not the means for defending myself. I wish for arms and ammunition ; I also want soldiers, not thirty or forty, but one hundred men." Piripi Te Kawe :" My words are the same as the others. Send me some soldiers ; send mo five hundred and up to a thousand. I first applied to Mr. Baker, then to Mr. White, and to you, O Captain." Captain Luce then addressed the meeting. Henari Kepe : " We want arms and ammunition ; we also wast soldiers ; we want a great number of them. There is plenty of land for them to dwell on. This is Waiapu, and it is yours. I want soldiers here as I am afraid of the King Natives." Hoani Ngatai: " Give us those things that we desire (arms, ammunition, and soldiers). We are . very anxious for those things. We want to find out why our hands have been tied for the last twenty

42

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5,

years or more ? why we have been told to live quietly here when there has been fighting going on elsewhere? Christianity has been here for more than twenty years, and has it succeeded in putting down the war ? If you do not consent to our application, we will persevere even until death. We are in great dread of the King's Natives, and also of the Hau Haus." Hoera: " Formerly I dwelt in darkness, but through Christianity I was enlightened—not quite enlightened, but partially. Now I am in darkness again ; I am enveloped in fog, and darkness surrounds me. Therefore, I ask for something to make my heart—to enlighten me with. I want arms and ammunition; after that I want soldiers —soldiers to protect me with." Hare Poai: "It is twenty-four years ago since I adopted Christianity, and now the Governor for the first time sends his representative to me. I have been constantly to my friends who are with the King party, to persuade them to come back, but without success. They would not heed me. On the 26th April, our minister (Mohi Turei) came back from Tauranga, and he wanted to go and see the King party, with a message from Wi Tako; but they prohibited him from going amongst them. I am desirous that a Resident Magistrate should be appointed to this place, to fill the vacancy caused by the loss of Mr. White ; next, I want arms and ammunition." Peta: "We are constantly being threatened on all sides; North and South have always threatened us. We have always been very forbearing towards them, and with great difficulty have managed to keep the peace. Therefore, we ask for arms and then for soldiers, not for us to look at or for our amusement, but to fight the King's Natives and the Pai Marires. As it has taken root here, murder will soon begin. Send us the arms directly ; do not delay." Epiniha : "We are greatly troubled and annoyed. First, the King party surrounded us ; now the Pai Marires have stepped in. We are like cattle that are enclosed and cannot get out. Murdering will soon take place ; therefore we ask for arms and ammunition, and for soldiers. A little while ago we heard that the 'Tiu' (Pai Marires) was coming here from Poverty Bay. We all turned out There were five hundred of us. We all had guns, but very few percussion caps. We could only make a demonstration." Hare Paihia (of Kakariki) : " There are two kinds of people in our pa —some are Queenites and some are Kingites. These are my words to the Governor, and do you convey them to him :■ —Friend, the Governor, —We are now living in great fear in our pa. Formerly we were not afraid, when we were of one mind. Even when some became Kingites we were not afraid. But since the murder of the Eev. Mr. Volkner we are afraid —especially that the Hau Haus have come near us. They delight in murder. This is our word to you. Send us some guns for Kakariki, and also some ammunition. Let there be plenty of powder and caps. ' Whom, if his son ask bread, will he give him a stone.'" Timo : " Here is what we have been considering to-night, as you have come here from the Governor. When Mr. Volkner was murdered our minds were very dark. Then we heard that the " Tiu " was coming here, we turned out, but they did not come. If they had come, we would have taken them, and our minds would have been clear. Now the Kingites are quite near us. From the commencement they have threatened to kill us. Even now they have threatened us again. Therefore our request for arms and ammunition, and for 1000 soldiers. If this was granted lam sure they will submit quietly." Mohi Wharepoto: " Welcome, 0 friend! welcome, Captain Luce ! welcome, friend of the Governor ! Great is our sorrow and darkness of mind on account of Mr. White, who had so lately left us. Great is also our sorrow and anger for the murder of Mr. Volkner. When Mr. White was here, we discussed the same subject with him as we are now doing. We are desirous that arms and ammunition should be given to us. When we heard that the Pai Marires were coming here from Poverty Bay, we all turned out, to the number of 500 men. We went to Waikawa, and there waited one week ; but they did not come. If they had, we would have taken them prisoners and sent them up to Auckland by the first vessel. We were all armed with guns, but very few had percussion caps. This is our first danger —the want of caps; for if the Kingites come to fight us, we would not be able to hold out. We could only point our guns at them, and could not fire them." Anaru Teretere: " The commencement of the law was at Taue-te-wai-ora. Christianity was also first established in that pa; and the two thrived. We then asked for a Magistrate to come and live with us. Mr. Baker came, then Mr. White ; but now he has gone, and we are again left to ourselves. He had our letters to the Governor, but they are gone with him; and now we ask you, Captain Luce, to convey these words of ours to the Governor." Te Warihi: " Hohoro mai cte hove ! Kawaka c Whakawa; Ara ka turua ta to Popokorua, &c." The Runanga then broke up. Te Nukena, in conversation, said, " That previous to H.M.S. ' Esk's' visit to Hick's Bay, the King Natives on the coast were very annoying. They built a fence to prevent people from passing up and down the coast. It was first put up to prevent Mr. Baker from passing. Whenever they wanted to travel, they always went in a large party. As for being invited to have something to eat was quite out of the question. But now, for the first, they have said, 'Te Nukena, come and eat;' but I would not. lam glad that you have come here ; it has frightened them, and they do not quite feel secure, as they see now that a man-of-war can come and go without their being in a position to prevent it. I would be glad if they could be driven away altogether. You have heard that my Runanga have expressed their views. It is the desire of my people —of 700 men. They are ready to obey the Governor's word. If the Governor wants me to go to Opotiki, I am ready. There was a talk here that the Kingites were going to Maketu. If they attempt it, I will accompany them to Hick's Bay ; and when I get there, I shall ask to return. If they refuse, I will compel them —fighting shall take place. I have made up my mind to this. I have heard what we did when wo heard that the Hau Haus were coming here. I was ready then to fight. I am anxious to settle these Kingites. I was hard pushed by them one time. I will at them yet. We are very sorry for Mr. White ; he was a good m«.Ti—a patient man: everybody liked him, even the Kingites, although, when he first came, they threatened to kill him, and forbade him from visiting them. Before he left, they were constantly referring cases for him to settle ; cases that they could not settle themselves. Even now, the King Natives are very sorry that he has gone. If he had lived, they would in time have come round. I

43

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5,

tad made some arrangements with Mr. "White. It is all lost now, and will have to be done over again. "We had arranged for a schoolmaster to come and teach our children; for a doctor ; for a blacksmith ; and a shoemaker. Our plan was—first, the school; the house and fencing were to be done by us. Ploughing and sowing was ours; harvesting ours. The boys of the school could keep the grounds in order between the sowing and harvest time. By this arrangement the school would support itself. Second —the doctor. "We would find him with a house; and we would pay him £70 per annum. Some would be subscribed in money. Those that had no money would subscribe in wheat, maize, pigs, horses, and cattle, which of course would realise cash. The old and poorest would contribute potatoes and other things that would come in useful in the house. Third —the blacksmith and shoemaker. "We will find them houses to live in ; but they must earn their living by their trades. There is plenty of work for them. lam desirous that these things should be established to benefit my people. I would also like to have an agent in Auckland to sell our produce for us, and to do all our business for us. "We will ask the Governor to appoint one for us. I hope the Governor will soon send us another Magistrate, as good as Mr. White. I would like to receive the Governor's answer soon. If you would give two of my friends a passage in your vessel, they would be able to receive the Governor's answer, and also to press the matter personally, and be able to talk about general matters. I would like Te Wikiriwhi, To Matehe, and Hotene Tuoi, to go up with you. I would also like to go to Poverty Bay with you, and I will return overland. I have to go along the coast." James Fulloon. Captain Luce's Address to the Natives assembled at Waiapu, on the Ist May, 1865. " I thank you for your welcome, and am glad that the Governor asked me to be the bearer of this message. That message consists of a few words. Encourage in every way all the tribes you meet to continue faithful to the law and to the Christian religion. Tell them that that is the best and only way to bring peace, security, and prosperity. Those who remain firm and quiet will reap this reward. Those who break the peace and follow the silly Pai Marire superstition are sure to bring sorrow and misery on themselves. The Pakeha and Maori must bo friends, and the Maoris will be greater gainers by that friendship than the Pakehas. The Governor hears everything. He has heard with great pleasure of the brave and faithful bearing of Morgan and his tribe. He desired me to thank them, and to say that the Government would not forget their good conduct, but that they would meet their own reward. Of some other of the neighbouring tribes the reports have not been so favourable. The Governor wished me to see and give his message to all who came to me, to encourage them to be true, and to hear and carry to him anything they wished to say. The Governor, as well as the rest of you, regrets the death of poor Mr. White. If you are all anxious that another Magistrate should be sent to you, I will tell him so, and I believe he will quickly accede to your request; and he will give his best attention to any request you may send to him through me. You have been unfortunate in the fate of those who have visited you. The first was drowned on landing, the second soon met the same fate. We, the Pakeha, say there is luck in No. 3, and I hope that my visit will have good fortune, and will be remembered as the beginning of better and quieter times. I can promise nothing, but I have eyes to see and ears to hear, and my report shall be faithful." James Puhoon. Notes of Speeches at meeting held at Te Whakato, Poverty Bay, by the Eonqowhaeaatu Teibe, to Captain Luce, H.M.S. " Esk," May 4th, 1865. Eraihia Te Kotuku : " Welcome, Te Mokena ! welcome, Captain! welcome, Te Mokena! Twice have you brought the Pakeha here. You have again brought your ' Kopura' (seed potato). You brought Mr. White here, now you bring the Captain of the man-of-war. Welcome, Pakeha ! You are not the first to come to us. There is a Minister (Archdeacon Williams). There was a Bishop. We were called Christians. Welcome !It was you Europeans that brought Christianity to us. We are still Christians. Do you hearken. We are neutrals. This place is called Turanga-whakahcke-pounamu (Turanga, the great receiver of green-stone). It is not of this place, but belongs to the Middle Island. It was brought to Wairarapa, then to this place. As with the Hau Hau, it did not emanate from this place. It came here, and I took hold of it and examined it, after which I cast it off." Pera Titongi: " Welcome, Captain! welcome from our mother ! welcome, and see the people and things of Turanga. Here we are, a neutral people, a people set apart for that purpose. They will not depart from it. You heard that we were Hau Haus. It is not true. We are not Hau Haus. Welcome, from afar!" Matenga Te Maioria : " Welcome, Captain ! and listen to the talk of Turanga. Welcome ! We are living peaceably, and we are neutrals. Welcome, Te Mokena, with your Pakeha friend ! Welcome ! We are living peaceably. We are not rash (or we will not commit ourselves neither one way or the other). We are listening to the talk (of this people), but do not heed them." Haoe-Tau o Manaia: " E kore i a nei te riri c maharatia. Welcome, Captain! Welcome, Pakeha to Turanga and to its people, to Eangowhakaata! Come and inquire into my conduct. Ido not believe in any false gods, or any other religion than the true one and the true God. lam living in peace (I am neutral). Behold, there is my Governor (pointing to the heaven). Welcome! Is your love true ? If so, lam for you. Consent and make peace with the whole of the Island ; then will I be for you." Te Wiremu Kiriahi: " Welcome, Te Mokena and Te Wikiriwhi! Welcome, with your Pakeha friend ! Hearken to my words. lam still holding on to my God, and he is my Governor. Welcome, Pakeha !My desire is that the Governor should come here. Bring him here." Eawiri Tamairiao : " Welcome !I am for the Governor. My word has gone amongst the tribes. It was for the union of the races. But other tribes did evil, and they have suffered. The Ngaiterangi, Waikato, Taranaki, Ngatiruanui, Wanganui,Te Urewera, and Ngatiporou, have all suffered. Welcome, Te Mokena! I have not wavered. I have not turned from one side to the other. Hearken. A cask of powder from this place was taken to Te Wairoa. We sent for it, and had it brought back. Eev. Mr. Yolkner was killed, and Mr. Grace held as prisoner. I went there also."

44

DESPATCHES PROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5.

Pita Ngungu: " Welcome, &c. lam holding on to my faith, and holding fast to my Governor. My religion is my Governor." Tamati Hapimana Te Eangituawaru: " Welcome, Te Mokena ! Welcome, with your Pakcha! You came with the other (Mr. White), but he has gone. Kanaka au c ruruku, &c. Welcome, Te Mokcna! We were at the Kohimarama Conference. I have remained true to my faith. We heard the kind words of the Pakeha. AYe still hear it. All the chiefs of New Zealand were there (Kohimarama). We heard what Te Hapuku said, that he would be quiet until he was slapped in the face. We all approved of it, but tribes have seceded. I hear that some of the Waiapu Natives took their powder (went to the war). You (Te Mokcna) were not strong to keep it back, but I was. I did not allow any to be taken from this place. When they took a cask of powder from this place to Te Wairoa, I went and brought it back, thus proving my love for our Pakehas. You want me to be on the Governor's side. lam that. Do I not pray to the Governor's God ? When you came with Mr. White, I asked him if he had come to make me a Governor's man. He said, No ; he had come to listen to what we had to say. Welcome, my son ! (Mr. Fulloon). Welcome, thou servant of the Governor's ! Come and examine my conduct. "Behold, lam a Governor's man. The very clothes that I wear are yours. My very ideas are yours. I have no thought for evil. I have not done anything. I did not drive the Bishop away. He ran away. I did not send him away. I did not send for or invite the Taranakis (murderers) to come here. When they came, I said that they were not to come. Welcome, my son, welcome! Hearken. Eeturn to Auckland, and let the Governor come here. Let him come directly." Wircmu Kingi Paia : " Welcome, Captain ! Welcome, Ngatiponu ! (Te Mokena, Te Whikiriwhi, and Hotene Turi). Welcome, Ngatiawa! (Mr. Fulloon). Welcome, To Mokcna! Welcome, our son ! If your visit is that of good, welcome on your work of good, and welcome in our faith ! Here I am, still holding on to our faith. Go to your side (Te Mokena). Eemain, remain to your side. I will hold on to mine (neutral). Welcome, 0 life! Welcome, my cousin ! Hearken. Make peace with the whole Island, that the Maoris may live. Make peace, make peace. Welcome with our son !My hands are not stained with blood ; behold they are clean, and not stained. That mad person (the Pai Marire) came here and made me foolish ; but I did not do anything (wrong), nor did I commit myself. This is my word: to live in peace, to protect the Pakehas, to live peaceably together, to grow up together, and they (the Pakehas) to be our protectors. I am a man of the Governor's. Am I not living quietly ? I will not consent to be a Governor's man (will not commit himself by an immediate declaration.) lam not a man of consequence, and lam living peaceably. lam neutral. Bring the words that I may hear. If I join the Hau Haus, there is evil; if I join the Governor, there would be evil: therefore, I remain neutral." Eutene : " Welcome my cousin Te Wikiriwhi; welcome with your friend the Pakeha ; welcome Captain. No moa te painga no to tuatahitanga, ka toka mai ki muri c tuki wai rama hau he manauhea ra ka whakapaituki au. Welcome! Bring the Governor here—bring him to this place. Examine the conduct of this people. Behold! there is a fault. Behold ! our cousin Takitunui is broken —not a slight crack, but a great split. The canoe is broken —broken —(an old man, Paora Te Arawhaiaki, indignantly sang out from the crowd: ' No, no ; it is not broken ; the canoe is not broken; that will do;"leave oft*,' &c.) —I repeat, the canoe is broken. When I returned I found the canoe broken. Welcome ! and bring life. There is yet the dust that was stirred up by your (Te Mokena) feet in that house when you were here last. They (Eangowhakaata) say that we have done no wrong yet. Behold the King's flag! behold the Hau Hau! I will not act rashly, but I shall be slow (will not declare himself at once on the side of the Government*) Welcome, Captain of the man-of-war ! the Governor's representative, and examine the conduct of this people. Do not imagine that I shall bow to that flag (pointing to the English ensign which was flying over the house above us ;) no, I will not; but do you return and take that thing away, and when you get to Auckland return again with the Governor — return immediately when you arrive; do not remain an hour—make haste. If you are away some time, I will endeavour to suppress the Hau Hau, and get them back to our faith." Te Mokena Kowhere then addressed the meeting, and urged them at once to join the Governor's side. It was no use their saying wait; they had better do so at once. Paora Kate : " Welcome, Captain Luce ! welcome, if you are sent by the Governor to see the people. If you want to hear the speeches, welcome! and listen. Or do you come with healing medicine ? Do you come to make us Government people ? Here are we praying to the same Supreme Governor. We are neutral. The Governor is fighting in different parts, but it is their (the Natives) fault. Hearken to my word : you will not succeed in turning this people to your side ; but do you return and bring the Governor and the Bishop here, then will we turn to you. We will not bow the knee to you, but we and our chiefs will bow our knees to the Governor and the Bishop —he that ran away from here, from this children's work (Hau Hau). I was deserted and left alone, but I have returned again to my faith." Te Wikiriwhi Te Matehe (Ngatiporou, addressing the meeting) : " Kaore hokiete aroha, ki taku matua kia Te Waiti ci! Tikina mai tirohia, tenei ka piriki te papa, raro o Humu Humu c, i ! &c." Salutations to you, oh people and friends, that have remained true to your faith (turning and looking inland) ! Salutations to you that have gone to the mountains, and into the woods, following that false and lying god; salutations to you! Hearken, ye people! Eeturn; return on board your canoe. Turanga, Turanga is the place, and Eongowhakaota its people ! Turanga was not associated with the name of Te Itanga-a-maheki: leave their false god to them. Waiapu was not associated with the name of Ngaitawera, but it is with that of Ngatiporou. But mind you, Ngatiporou, were divided : one part listened to the word—the other did not. They are like a dog which, when it scents the odour of another man's hangi (Maori oven) of meat, it goes to it. The Ngatiporou did so ; they went. Where are they ? They lie at Tauranga and at Te Kaokaoroa (Te Motutu). They were not buried amongst their ancestors or in the country of their forefathers: they are buried in a stranger's country —to enrich the soil for pumpkins for the Ngaitcrangi and the Ngatiawa. They would notlisten to the word, so they reaped their reward : such is the end of evil-doers. But Ngatiporou, that listened to the word, will do that which is said in Scripture —" they shall dwell in the land." M

45

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5,

The Bishop's letter was then read, after which Captain Luce addressed the meeting. Mr. Fulloon :" I have very little to say —what can I say ? You have heard the Governor's words ; they are not new, they are old —even from the beginning. My advice to you is, follow the Governor's advice. Some time since, Waikato said, the only way to save the Maori people and New Zealand was by means of the King. You know what the Governor said. Mark the result —Waikato has been driven out, and their country taken from them : the people of Waikato now arc white men. There is Tauranga, that has gone through the King. The Maoris there set up a new thing—a mad and foolish fanaticism, by adopting which, they said that the Pakehas would be driven into the sea, and New Zealand recovered to the Natives. Behold the fruits that it has brought forward—Wanganui has gone —Ngatiruanui has gone ! The whole country has been taken ; the people have been driven out, and are now living in the mountains ! A great many of them have been killed, although they did sing out,. ' E Kuoa ! Pai Marire ! Hau Ilau !' Your great prophet, Te Ua, or Horopapera, as you call him, is now sueing for peace (kua tangi ia). The head of this thing has been broken, and yet you receive it with open arms. You all have said that you will be neutral; remain so. I will remember it; mind that you do not depart from it. If you should do so, you will surely get the worst of it. Adhere to those words of yours, for I am watching you." Hotene Turi (Ngatiporou, addressing the meeting) : " These are my words to you,Eongowhakaota. You knew that that band of Ilau Haus had murdered Mr. Volkner, and yet you received them ; you also heard that they were going to Waiapu, but you did not let them come on; you warned them not to do so : it was you who told them to return ! Why did you not let them come on ? for they were coining to kill us. If they had come, I would have punished them. When I heard that they were coming to us, we gathered together, and we went to Waikawa (Open Bay), and there we waited for one week : there were 500 of us. Henare (Potae) had 200 at Anara waiting for them. Why did you not wait until we had been killed, before you listened to their god ? If they had succeeded in killing us, then you might have believed in it. You should not have jumped at it at once, before you knew whether it was a true god or not. It was you that saved them. You should have let them come on to us, and we would have settled them [The speaker was here interrupted, and told that the reason that they sent the Hau Haus back was that they might proceed by the road that had been used as a war-path, by the road that the Ngatiporou had used when they went to fight the Pakehas. They would not allow them to go through Turanga, as it was a neutral place, and had not been crossed by war parties]. They came for the purpose of attacking us, and you should have allowed them to come on. It was you that saved them." Eaharui Eukupo (Hau Hau, a convert) : " It was the Bishop's fault that the Hau Haus had been received by the Eongowhakaoto. He (the Bishop) said to them that the Pai Marire should be received by them. They (the Natives) wanted to prevent them from coming amongst them to Turanga ; they would have done so, but for the Bishop. Then, when they did come, he ran away. It was true that some of them had taken to it. When the Hau Haus came here from Te Wairoa, we would not allow them to come amongst us ; wo sent them back by the way they came. We wanted to do the same to those that came from Opotiki, but the Bishop would not let us. The Governor advises us to live peaceably at home : it is well, and yet he is fighting against some of the Maoris. As long as there was war in New Zealand, the Natives would sympathise with their countrymen. When the bow of the canoe is split, it is repaired at once, or else it will split along the whole length of the canoe. So with New Zealand :as long as there is war, the Natives will always be agitated by it. If a person lias a little sore, ever so small, the whole body will feel it. My word to the Governor is, to make peace with the whole of the Natives, and cease his fighting. - Although he has been victorious, he will meet with a reverse if he continues. His sword is sharp, but it shall not prevail against God's. God will bo angry if he does not make peace; if he does not hasten to make peace, the Lord will punish him. Let him not think of his victories. All the islands and the whole world is dwelling in light, but New Zealand is the only place dwelling in darkness : a great fog hangs over this island. This is my word : the Governor shall drive this fog away, and cause light to shine on this land. You have heard our desire of remaining here quietly : we will do so. We never sought the King, neither did we go to the war. It has been said that Waikato has been driven away, and their country taken away from them, and that Wanganui has also been taken. That is true enough, but the statement that Te Ua is in the mountains is false :TeUa is not yet defeated. Let the Governor make peace at once." Mr. Fulloon: " The Governor has always been anxious to make peace; do you persuade the Natives to make peace." Kerehona, (?) of tho Waerengahika College, then got up and explained the Bishop's conduct in reference to the Hau Haus. He said that it was the Eunanga that proposed that the Hau Haus should be allowed to come to Waerengahika, in hopes of being able to do something to rescue the Eev. Mr. Grace. It was not as Eaharuhi said, that it was the Bishop that proposed they should be allowed to come ; it was the chiefs of Tauranga. Archdeacon Williams then addressed the meeting, and entered into the details of the Hau ITau's visit, and the action of the Eunangas, and how they altogether deserted the Bishop and received them with open arms, and joined them in their foolish work. (Eaharuhi and two or three others admitted that the Archdeacon's statement was correct). Wi Pere (of AVaerengahika) : " Welcome, Pakeha ! Welcome, Captain of the man-of-war! Hearken. lam alone, and what lam going to say is for myself. I cannot speak for anybody, because the whole of my tribe has gone into the bush after that foolish and false God. lam alone ; at least there are those three men with me. lam anxious to join the Government side, but not just now. I will not be hasty ; lam desirous of saving some of my friends and relatives. After you have gone, I shall go to work and try and recover my people. Should Ibe able to get one a day, I shall be satisfied. This is a good work. Although my people have left me, my love is great for them —they are my relations ; but for all that, I won't go over to their side ; I will remain where I am, and in the event of anything taking place or threatening them, will I come over at once and join your side. When I am seen amongst you, then know that something is near. I will not declare myself now; for if I did, I

46

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5.

would not be able to persuade any of my people to come back, because the name Governor is a bugbear to them, and rouses their anger. Be satisfied that lam on your side." Eutene: [Read a portion of the Bishop's letter —that part that stated that the Governor had expressed to him his desire of visiting Poverty Bay, and his advice not to do 80, but to send a man-of-war down and see the Natives, and if they then invited the Governor, it would be clear.] " i"ou hear what the Bishop says iv his letter —the Governor is desirous of coming. We are anxious that he should come. We all agree in saying let the Governor come, that he may see and hear what we have to say, and that we might see and hear what he has to say. We cannot say what will bo done when he comes, but certainly food will bo placed before him. I cannot tell what kind of food will be given to him ; but you know what kind of food Maori food is like—it is not liko the Pakehas. We bid the Governor welcome. He has never been to see us. Why is it that ho has not been here ? Is it because we are 'tutuas?' or are we beneath his notice ? We say, come and see these his children. As you cannot wait, give him our message; we would have written to him, but as you cannot wait, you can tell him. Do not be long away —make haste !" Wiremu Kingi Paia : " Hearken to my word. The Governor is desirous of seeing us ;we are desirous that he should come, that I might see his face, that he also might sec my face. This is my word. Let him come here ; come to Tauranga. Why has he not been here, to this quiet and peaceable place ? He has visited every other place but this. Are they the only men in New Zealand ? Look at his people Waikato ! lie used to visit them, and see how they have treated him ! But peaceable and quiet Turanga he has not visited. Welcome, 0 Governor, to Turanga, and to its people !" Captain Luce (as some of the Natives began moving about) then said : " I have heard enough ; I have heard many excuses for what has past, but few promises for the future. My last word of advice to you is to remain quiet and peaceable, and I trust to time to bring all back on our side. I will report to the Governor what I have heard and seen, and he will judge what is best for him to do, whether to come to you or to wait for more settled times ;" and that, as it was getting late, he wished to tell them that he would repeat to the Governor all that he had seen and heard. It remained entirely with the Governor whether he would come or not; if he did, he hoped to have the pleasure of bringing him down. He then wished the Chiefs good-bye, and the meeting ended. Memo.- —Two or three of the speakers stated that Mr. Rice had asked them to arrest the Hau Haus (murderers) when they arrived from Opotiki; but they declined, as Turanga was a neutral place. They said that they should send them back to Opotiki when they came, and then they could bo arrested where their crime was committed. It was for the Governor and the Pakehas to arrest them. Jxx.es Fulloon. Address of Captain Lttce to the Natives assembled at Poverty Bay, on 4th May, 1865. I have brought you a letter from your Bishop and a message from tho Governor. The letter you have heard, the Governor read it, and approves of its contents. The Governor's message is this : — " Encourage the tribes in every possible way to remain firm in tho Christian religion, to keep the peace, and to obey the law. Those who do this, and who distinguish themselves by maintaining order and peace, will be very favourably remembered by tho Government, and will find themselves travelling on the right road; but be sure that no act of violence will long remain unpunished. Those who continue troublesome and try to bring bad feeling and distrust between the Pakeha and the Maori are on the wrong road ; they and their children's children will suffer for their folly. No power on earth can now drive the Pakeha from New Zealand ; but there is ample room for both Pakeha and Maori, and when quiet is restored, the Government will as carefully protect the rights of the Maories as those of the Pakeha. You have asked for the Governor to come here. What good will result by his. coming ? Ido not think he will like to come on a fruitless journey. If his coming would- do good, I think he would be glad to visit you. Tour Bishop left you to save himself from insult; and perhaps his life was even in danger. If you want him back, send to assure him that lie will be welcomed, and receive the respect due to his office. Let me hope that my message will be well received. lam ready to hear, and promise faithfully to report to the Governor, any message you may wish to send him." I have heard enough. I have heard many excuses for what has past, but few promises for the future. My last word of advice to you is to remain quiet and peaceable, and I trust to time to bring all back on our side. I will report to the Governor what I have heard and seen, and he will judge what is best for him to do —whether to come to you, or to wait for more settled times." James Pulioox. Enclosure 2 to Xo. 45. His Excellency the Goyerxoe to Captain Luce, It.N. Sib, — Government House, Auckland, ISth May, 1863. It being very desirable that further information should be obtained regarding the place where the principals iv the murder of the late Mr. Volkner are now residing, I have the honor to request that you would allow one of Her Majesty's vessels under your command to receive on board Mr. Fulloon the interpreter, and the Native chief Tiwai, and order that the vessel you may send should proceed to Opotiki, for the purpose of holding communication with the Natives there, and that she should also call at the other places in the Bay of Plenty, named in the margin, if the officer in command sees reason to think that a communication with the Natives of those places may conduce to tho apprehension of any of the persons implicated in the murder of Mr. Yolkner. I have, &c, Captain Luce, E.N., H.M.S. "E*k." G. Geet. Xo. 46. His Excellency the Gotebsoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 23rd May, 1865. I yesterday received a letter from Sir D. Cameron, in which he states as follows : — " It is my duty to furnish the Secretary of State for War -with any information that I think may

Wkakatane, TimapahoiT, Omahio, Tekaha.

No, 73.

47

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OP STATE.

A.—No. 5,

be useful to Her Majesty's Government regarding the management of affairs in the Colony, as far as they relate to the manner iv which the troops are employed. In these confidential communications I always state my opinions unreservedly, although they may occasionally be unfavorable to your Excellency and the Colonial Ministers. I shall continue to do so —and I know of no regulation which requires the Officer Commanding the Troops in a Colony to furnish the Governor of that Colony with copies of the official or private letters which he addresses to the Secretary of State for War. To do so in this Colony, whilst under your Excellency's government, would evidently be to communicate the contents of his letters to the Colonial Ministers, and through them to the whole Colony." 2. The power thus exercised by Sir D. Cameron, and which he states he continues to exercise, is to make confidential communications to Her Majesty's Government, in which he unreservedly states his opinions, although they be unfavorable to myself and my Ministers, regarding our management of affairs in the Colony, as far as they relate to the manner in which the troops are employed. 3. I find it difficult to believe that Her Majesty's Government have entrusted such powers to any officer, or that they have received from him secret reports unfavorable to my management of affairs in the Colony without acquainting me with them, which they have never yet done. But as Sir D. Cameron alleges that such is the case, I beg to be permitted to state my objections to the adoption of the course he says he has followed, and intends to continue. 4. Firstly, I would state that it was never proposed to me to exercise such a power in relation to Sir D. Cameron, nor would I for a single hour have held my office subject to the condition of making such confidential communications regarding him. No one knows better than yourself, that I have never, privately or publicly, made any communication unfavorable to him to Her Majesty's Government. The only case in which I ever even brought a difference of opinion between us under your notice, was in my Despatches Nos. 53 and 54, of the 27th ultimo, in answer to complaints he had previously Bent home against me. Those two Despatches I immediately communicated to Sir D. Cameron, before I sent them to you. To give him, therefore, a power in relation to the Governor of this Colony, which the Governor neither possesses nor would exercise in relation to the General, is to place the Governor in an unfair position. 5. Secondly, to give an officer the power of making confidential reports to Her Majesty's Government unfavorable to his superior, is almost certain to render this officer possessing the secret irresponsible power over his superior, overbearing to that superior, to prejudice him against him, to prevent him from regarding him as really being in any respect his superior officer; and as the fact of the junior exercising this power, or claiming to exercise it, in relation to his superior, is certain to become known in the Colony, it must irretrievably damage the position of the Governor, and weaken his influence. 6. Thirdly, The public service can in no way be promoted by such a proceeding. It is impossible but that opinions unfavorable to a high public servant being from time to time forwarded to Her Majesty's Government in secret and confidential communications from another high public servant, must prejudice by degrees the minds of Her Majesty's Ministers against the former, and weaken their confidence in him. The more generously he acts towards his secret censor, the more he suppresses all mention of his mistakes and shortcomings and brings his merits into notice, the more that superior officer is damaging himself, and adding weight and intensity to secret statements, unfavorable to himself, of which he knows nothing. 7. Again, if there is anything in the management of affairs in this country which is injurious either to the Imperial interests or to the troops, surely it should be remedied at once. The Governor should be at once acquainted with it; ho should not keep it secret from his Ministers, but should communicate it to them, and require an alteration in the proceedings objected to. If, on the other hand, the General Officer was wrong, then he could be told so, as well as the reasons on which this conclusion was formed, and he could openly refer the question for the decision of Her Majesty's Government. Secretly to report unfavorably to Her Majesty's Government of the Governor and his Ministers regarding the management of affairs in this country, is neither to get anything wrong remedied nor to attempt to get it remedied, but rather to paralyze the action of Her Majesty's Government, who could hardly interfere with energy and confidence on a secret report, to get what was wrong put right, —and to create unjustly an unfavorable impression against those who are ignorant of what is taking place, and who are shut out from all means of explanation. Thus such a proceeding is in itself unjust and unfair, and opposed alike to the public interests and to individual rights. 8. To say that the result of letting the Governor know that such unfavorable statements against himself and his Ministers had been confidentially made to Her Majesty's Government, would be to let the Colonial Ministers know them, and through them the whole Colony, seems to be no answer to the objections against such proceedings. 9. If the unfavorable statements are true, and what was wrong was being done by the Governor and his Ministers, it would be a shameful libel on the Colony and the General Assembly to say that they would not insist upon an alteration being at once made in the proceedings complained of. They would have every reason to do so ; first the sense of what is right, then the knowledge that they are altogether dependent upon Great Britain for assistance, and that by the British nation their proceedings must be judged and scrutinised; the more public their wrong proceedings were made, the more certainly would they be speedily put a stop to. 10. It would appear that a reasonable check upon unfavorable reflections being unfairly and unreservedly made upon the Governor and his Ministers, regarding the management of affairs in this Colony, would be that such complaints should be openly and fairly made, otherwise their standing with Her Majesty's Government depends entirely upon the temper, judgment, and self-control of an irresponsible person, against whom they seem to be entirely without protection. 11. Many other obvious arguments of equal force could be used against the course which Sir D. Cameron says he has pursued in this respect; and as he says he intends to continue to pursue it, I trust that he may be directed at once to desist from making confidential communications to Her

48

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5.

Majesty's Government unfavorable to myself and my Ministers regarding the management of affairs in the Colony, and that he may be directed to forward all such communications openly through me. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 47. His Excellency the Goyeenoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaby of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 24th May, 1865. I have the honor to transmit notes of the substance of a message I have received from Matutaera, lately so-called Maori King, and from Eewi, the principal leader of the rebel Natives, from which I think that there is little doubt that they intend to return to their allegiance. 2. I have within the last few days received from an authentic source further information which strengthens my opinion that they are sincere in their desire to return to friendly relations with the Government. 3. You will observe that Mr. George Graham is the person Matutaera and Eewi expressed a desire to see. In compliance with their wishes, I have allowed that gentleman to visit them, as is shown in the enclosed correspondence, and in a few days I shall hear the result of his visit. 4. A letter, dated 10th of March, from Hori te "Waru, another of the rebel leaders, only reached me three days ago. He was an old and attached friend of mine in former years. He has returned to his allegiance, and his letter has made me resolve to proceed at once to Kawhia, there to see the principal rebel chiefs. I propose to sail to that place as soou as H.M.S. " Eclipse" returns from Opotiki. I have, &c., The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure 1 to No. 47. Statement of Apoeo Kotikotiki to His Excellency Sir George Geet, X.C.8., at Government House, Auckland, April 24th, 1865. Hearing in the early part of January last that the soldiers were going to Kawhia in the steamers, I proceeded to Whaingaroa for the purpose of going to Hangitiki, to urge upon the Natives not to attack them if the steamer should go to Kawhia, but rather to go and trade with them. On the 20th January, I sent a letter to Te Wetini, Te Waitere, to Eewi, and all the chiefs, requesting them to meet mo at Hangitiki. On the 23rd I myself arrived there, accompanied by Anatipa. I found Te Waitere, To Wetini, Porokoru, Toma, and about three hundred men assembled there. After they had gone through the Pai Marire worship, I went up to the " niu" (flagstaff round which they go through their ceremonies), and said to them, " Hearken, ye children of Israel; there is but one God, the Lord Jehovah. Do not think that the Governor derives his power from himself. It is from God. See the Philistines believed in their own strength, and yet the children of Israel were given over to them by the Lord. But now, O people, do not take the name of the Lord in vain. From whence came this ?" (laying his hand on the " niu"). Te Wetini answered, " From trouble (mate). What is it to you? It is my sackcloth" (kahu taratara). "If such is the case, Ido not find fault with it, for such is the conduct of those who are in trouble." Eewi, being the great spirit of the Ngatimaniapoto, was sent for, and he arrived on the 2nd February. I said to him, " Eewi, why did you not obey the Governor's letter, and send him your guns when he asked you for them ? If I had been here, I would have hastened to obey him. You should have returned him those things, for they originally came from him." I further said to him, " What about your hand and the Governor's hand holding each other's hands ?" His answer was, " When I actually behold the man to unfasten our hands, then will I put my sword down. I will let you be the bearer of my word. Eeturn and fetch a person from the Governor's Eimanga. Bring him here, and then the correctness of the word will be seen — i.e., the putting down of the sword." I then said, " Let that word be carried." Eewi and Matutaera named Mr. George Graham as the person they would like to see. I then returned to Auckland." Shortly after, news was received of the murder of the Eev. Mr. Tolkner, and I heard it rumoured that it was Eewi's doing. I immediately went to Kawhia, and saw Eewi. I charged him with acting treacherously with me. He answered he had not, but that he was patiently waiting for an answer to his word, and told me to return again for the answer. James Fflloon. Enclosure 2 to No. 47. Mr. Geoege Geaham, Auckland, to the Defence Ministeb. Sic,— Cliff, Hobson Street, Auckland, 3rd May, 1865. I have the honor to inform you that I intend to go into the interior of this Province in a few days, and that I expect to meet William Thompson and some other Waikato chiefs that have been in arms against us. I believe that I can persuade them to lay down their arms, and take the oath of allegiance. I know that Thompson and some other chiefs of the Lower Waikato fear to come in before any officer of Government, believing that if they do so they will be made prisoners. Can you authorize me to assure them or any of them that if they wish for an interview for the purpose of making peace that their personal liberty shall be respected ? I have, &c, The Hon. the Defence Minister. Geo. Geahaji.

No. 74. . Statement by Te "Aporo,24th April. Mr. Graham to Major Atkinson, 3rd May, 1865. Private Sec!, to Mr. Graham, 9th May, 1 1865, Hori to Waru to Sir G. Grey, 10th March, 1865. Sir G-. Grey, to i Hori to Waru, 23rd May, 1865.

49

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETAEY OF STATE.

A..—No. 5.

Enclosure 3 to No. 4-7. His Excellency the Governor to Mr. George G-raham, Auckland. Sib, — Private Secretary's Office, Auckland, 9th May, 1865. His Excellency the Governor having been informed that there is a desire on the part of some of the Natives of Waikato who have recently been in arms against us that you should visit them, in order to communicate to them the Governor's Proclamation of 17th of December last, desires me to inform you that he approves of your visiting them, and begs that you will take that opportunity of bringing prominently before them the following passage in his letter addressed to Pene Te Warepu and other chiefs of "Waikato on the 16th of December, 1863, of which I have now the honor to enclose you a copy:—" If the chiefs of Waikato desire to know the lino of conduct the Governor will pursue towards them for the future, if they now submit to the authority of the Government, the Governor will receive at Auckland any deputation of chiefs that they may send to him. Such deputation shall be kiudly received, and in every way well treated; and the Governor, who always has and still takes the greatest interest in their welfare, will fully explain to them the future intentions of the Government, and will hear any representations they may have to make, and then shall be allowed to return in peace to the place they came from. His Excellency requests that you will further assure them again that he still continues to take, as he always has done, the greatest interest in their welfare, and that if they now give in their submission to the Government they will be treated with generosity and kindness. I have, <fee, G. Graham, Esq., Auckland. Feed. Thatcher, Private Secretary. Enclosure 4 to No. 47. Feiend the Governor, — Eakarama, 10th March, 1865. Salutation. This is my letter that I write to you. Salutation. Listen : I have taken the oath of allegiance before the White Man Magistrate at Baglan—l have delivered myself up. Because of my love to you I now write this letter to you. In it is my love to you. I wish much to see you, that we may talk face to face. It is my wish, if you are good enough, to write to me—let us write (to each other). I have a great desire to see you. My abode is at Kawhia, along with Hone Teone of Wihikairo, a Government Magistrate. If you are willing, write to me. I have a great desire to see you, both myself and Petera. Friend, when this letter comes to you, write quickly back yours to me. Enough. From me Hoei te Waetj to you. Enclosure 5 to No. 47. Friend George,— Auckland, 23rd May, 1865. Greeting. I have received your letter of the 10th of March. Friend, I was much grieved the time you went to the other side ; but now that you have expressed a wish to come back to me your father, I am very glad. lam going some time hence to Kawhia: then we shall talk face to face. From your friend, G. Geet, To George te Waru, Aotea, by way of Eaglan. the Governor. No. 48. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary or State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Auckland, 30th May, 1865. Adverting to my Despatch No. 7-1, of the 24-th instant, in which I informed you that I had, in compliance with the wishes expressed by the so-called Maori King and other chiefs, assented to Mr. George Graham being the person to visit them on behalf of the Government to receive their submission, I have now the honor to enclose a copy of a Despatch which was received last night from Brigadier-General Carey, reporting that Wm. Thompson had come before him accompanied by Mr. Graham, and had made his own submission to the Government, as also that of the so-called Maori King, which he was authorized to do. 2. I have no doubt that I shall in a few days be able to report to you that the war is virtually terminated in this part of New Zealand, and I have every hope that the example set by the leading rebel chiefs in this part of the Island will be followed shortly throughout the entire Colony. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 49. His Excellency the Goteenom to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Auckland, 30th May, 1865. Adverting to my Despatch No. 72, of the 23rd instant, I have now the honor to transmit a copy of the letter of proceedings from Captain Fremantle, of H.M.S. " Eclipse," in relation to the recent visit to the Bay of Plenty. I have, &c, The Eight Hoe. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey.

No. 76.

Vide A. No. 4, p. 52.

No, 78. Capt. Luce to Sir G. Grey, 26th May, 1865.

50

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5,

Enclosure to No. 49. Captain Luce, 8.N., to His Excellency the Goveenob. Sib,— H.M.S. " Esk," Auckland, New Zealand, 26th May, 18G5. In compliance with your requisition of the 18th instant, I despatched Captain Fremantle in H.M.S. " Eclipse" to the Bay of Plenty. He returned this day, and I beg to forward for your information his letter of proceedings. I have, &c, Sir George Grey, X.C.8., &c. J. P. Lttce, Captain. Letteb op Proceedings. Sib,— H.M.S. " Eclipse," at Auckland, New Zealand, 26th May, 1865. Since leaving Auckland, on the morning of the 19th instant, in compliance with your orders " to act in any way that might conduce to the apprehension of any of the parties implicated in the murder of Mr. Volkner," I have to inform you that we communicated with the following places in the order named —namely, Whakatane, Opotiki, Ohiwa, Wangaparawa, Eau-ko-kore, To Kaha, and Te Awanui. The summary of the information we have gained is as follows : —We have ascertained that Kereopa and a considerable body of the Opotiki Natives under the Mohi-Mohi are now inland of Ohiwa, in the TTrewera country en route to Taranaki; that Patara, accompanied by about 20 Taranaki Natives, was at Eau-ko-kore, where I saw him on the 24th instant, but is now, 1 trust, on his return to Opotiki; that Eparaima, the half-casto who put the rope round Mr. Volkner's neck, was at Te Awanui yesterday, where he succeeded in escaping from our men after being, as I believe, wounded ; and that many of those more immediately concerned are still at Opotiki, where I trust that the result of our operations during the past week will have concentrated all those persons more immediately implicated in Mr. Volkner's murder. I now proceed to give a detailed account of what occurred at each of the places I have named. At Wliakatane —I landed with Mr. Fulloon on the morning of the 20th instant, and communicated with the chief Aponui, who gave us a good deal of information, and as an earnest of his goodwill in our cause his son accompanied us to Opotiki. —AVe anchored off the bar there on the morning of the 21st instant, and landed the chief Tiwai in the river; at 3 p.m. we re-embarked him, having just pulled up the river and round the village, in doing which we were not molested. Only two or three Natives met us either time, and their conduct, although not exactly hostile, was at any rate unfriendly. Having ascertained through Tiwai that several of those implicated in the murder were at the village of Pcnau, on the beach about a mile and a half from the entrance of the river, I thought it would be possible to surprise them during the night. At 2 a.m. I landed in the river with a party of about sixty men, and we proceeded along the beach to our destination. On arriving at the village it seemed deserted, and at the same time several Maoris were observed to be watching us. Supposing that our design of a surprise was frustrated, I ordered a retreat, at the same time cautioning our advance and rear guards to scour the sandhills on our left to guard against an ambuscade. About half a mile from the boats a portion of our advanced guard discovered some Natives behind a wood pile, who fired at them. Their fire was immediately returned, and two Maoris fell. On our side Lance-Corporal Corker received a severe flesh wound in the arm. The enemy then disappeared, leaving a musket behind them. We have since heard that two chiefs were missing the next day ; but neither that night nor the next morning, when I landed with Lieutenant Boughey to search for a revolver which had been dropped, could we find any bodies. After this skirmish we re-embarked without further molestation; and the next morning, having recovered the missing revolver, I left for Ohiwa —where Aponui's son next wished to be landed. On sounding in going in and out, I found that at least two and a half fathoms could be carried over the bar at high-water, and that inside there is plenty of room ; that evening we anchored off Te Kaha —but as it was blowing fresh from the westward we were unable to land, and on the morning of the 24th proceeded to take shelter in Wancjaparawa. —An old whaler called Tumei came aboard, and told us that Patara and about twenty Taranaki Natives were at Eau-ko-kore, only two or three miles off, intending to march to the East Cape in a few days. The next morning I landed with Mr. Fulloon, Lieutenant Boughey, one or two others, and accompanied by Tiwai we walked up to Eau-ko-kore, to communicate with the chief Te Hata, and see what could be done towards securing Patara. Te Hata promised to be at all events neutral, but was evidently rather afraid of Patara, who arrived in the course of the forenoon surrounded by armed men, and wished to know what we wanted. Finding that it would be difficult to do anything with the small force at our disposal, we were obliged to be satisfied with insisting on Patara's return to Opotiki; and as Te Hata backed us up, he was obliged reluctantly to acquiesce, although he denied any complicity in the murder. Patara appeared quite prepared against a coup-de-main, and, confident in his strength, he held a hunting whip under his arm, but nad evidently a pocket pistol in each pocket. Finding that we could do no more at Eau-ko-kore, at 4 a.m. on the 25th I left for Te Kaha. —Landed there at daylight, and saw the chief Kape, and hearing from him that William King was at Te Au-anui, we went on there, and on William King's coming on board, he told us that Eparaima, the half-caste was living in a whare close to the beach. Tiwai having volunteered to go and point him out, I got two of our seamen, armed with revolvers to accompany him, disguised as Maoris, and they landed in a small boat, with orders to take him, dead oi^ alive. The ruse was entirely successful, and Eparaima suspected nothing until one of our men took him by the hand. He succeeded in shaking himself clear, however ; and although wounded and grappled with by the other seaman afterwards, he succeeded in escaping. I landed immediately with a boat's crew, and we searched the bush for a long time, without success. lam much vexed at his eluding us, but there were many women round him,

51

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

£,—No. 5.

which assisted his escape, and prevented our men from firing their revolvers effectively. He had ten shots fired at him ; and had not the revolvers missed fire several times, he must have been killed. We returned to Auckland at 2 p.m. to-day. In conclusion, I beg to thank Mr. Fulloon for his zeal, and the assistance he rendered me on every occasion. I have, &c, To Captain John P. Luce, H.M.S. " Esk." E. E. Feemantle, Commander.

No. 50. His Excellency tho Goyeenoe to the Eight Hon. the Sechetaet of State for the Colonies. Sic, — G-overnment House, Auckland, Gth June, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information copies of two letters which I have received from Sir D. Cameron, relative to the proceedings of Colonel "Warre, C.8., at Taranaki, and of my replies. 2. You will see that Sir D. Cameron intends to report to the Secretary of State for War what he regards as objectionable conduct on the part of Colonel Warre at Taranaki. I am satisfied that the more Colonel Warre's proceedings are inquired into, the more will they be found to have been energetic, courageous, and judicious, and in every way calculated at a very critical time to secure the safety of Her Majesty's possessions in this country. 3. I beg therefore that the inquiry into Colonel Warre's proceedings, which Sir D. Cameron's accusations have rendered necessary, may at once be instituted, as justice to Colonel Warre, to the Colonial Government, and to myself, appears to demand that this should be done. I have, &c, G. Ghet. P.S. —Since I had the honor of addressing this Despatch to you, Sir D. Cameron has informed me that he hag transmitted to the Secretary of State for War the additional enclosures noted in the margin; I have therefore put up these letters for your information. I beg to call your attention to Sir D. Cameron's letter to me of the Ist of June, and beg that an inquiry may be instituted as to whether the statements made in my Despatch to you of the 20th May are unwarrantable, and whether I have misrepresented some facts, and omitted the most important ones. It should be borne in mind that every Despatch I write to you is seen by my Responsible Advisers, who would not fail instantly to point out in a Memorandum any errors they found in it, and thatnear ly every Despatch I write is subsequently published in the Colony, and freely discussed here, and is made known to Sir D. Cameron. On the other hand his Despatches are kept secret alike from myself and the public. Only recently Her Majesty's Government have made comments on my proceedings here, which are based on such secret Despatches written by Sir D. Cameron, which comments were unnecessary and undeserved, and calculated to weaken my influence, and are clearly based on erroneous information which should not have been given to Her Majesty's Government. The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. G. No. 51. His Excellency the Goyebnob to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government Hcruse, Auckland, Sth June, 18G5. It was with very great regret that I learned from your Despatch N~o. 20, of the 27th March, that you found difficulty in giving me your opinion on the important question of safety, because there appeared to be a discrepancy between my Despatches, and those of General Cameron to the Secretary of State for War, for that oilicer appeared to suppose that I expected from him services which would render necessary the continued presence in New Zealand, if not indeed the increase, of the present force. After stating this, your remarks clearly indicate your disappointment at my not having given you any explanation on this subject. 2. I trust that -I may be furnished with copies of the Despatches to the Secretary of State for War to which you allude that I may show how unjust and erroneous they are; indeed no better 2>roof could be given of this than General Cameron's recent letters to me, of which he tells me he is sending copies to the Secretary of State for AVar, in which letters he expresses it as his deliberate opinion that a gradual reduction of the force here may and ought to be commenced at once. As I never intend to do that which General Cameron has reported I was about to do I could give you no explanations regarding a subject which had never entered into my mind. 3. I beg to state that I think that the General Officer here ought not to be allowed to embarrass you with the difficulties General Cameron has done, by making secret reports to Her Majesty's Government, contrary to my public Despatches. General Cameron and my Responsible Advisers see everything that I write to you on such subjects; if they disagree with me, they should tell me so here, and allow me to send my views on their statements,together with such statements. Her Majesty's Government will then have before them both sides of the question, and be able to come to a decision, and give mo positive instructions. The course General Cameron has adopted is Pew to the public service, and can, I feel sure, only lead to such embarrassments as those which have sprung from it. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 52. His Excellency the Gotebnob to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Wellington, Gth July, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information the copy of a letter, dated the 21st of June,

No. 79. Tide A. No. 4. Sir D. Cameron to Sir G. Grey, 9th May, 1865. Sir G. Grey in reply, 12th May, 1865. Sir D. Cameron to Sir G. Grey, Ist June, 1865. Sir G. Grey in reply, 2nd June, 1865. Sir D. Cameron to Sir G. Grey, enclosing Colonel Warre's correspondence with Major Atkinson, sth June, 1865. Sir G. Grey in reply, GtU June, 1865. Sir D. Cameron to Sir G. Grc\, l>t June, 1865. The Private Secretary to the Assistant Military Secretary, 2nd June, 1865. The Assistant Military Secretary in reply, 3rd June, 1865.

No. 81.

No. 82. Sir D. Cameron to Sir G-. Grey, 21st June, 1865.

52

DESPATCHES PROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No 5

addressed to me by Sir D. Cameron, which I think he is likely to transmit to the Secretary of State for "War. This letter contains very serious misrepresentations which I am desirous should be corrected, and I beg you will therefore be good enough to bring them under the notice of Earl de Grey. 2. Sir D. Cameron says : —" If however the continued occupation of that position by the rebels really involves all the serious consequences represented by your Excellency, which I am very far from believing, your Excellency must bo held responsible for them. For in the first place, the three best months of the year for operations in the field were lost, in consequence of the postponement of hostilities by your Excellency until after the meeting of the General Assembly, a delay which would seem to have been unnecessary, if you had at that time determined under any circumstances, and whoever your Excellency's Eesponsible Advisers might be, to transfer the war to "Wauganui for the confiscation and occupation of territory; and in the next place, your Excellency's instructions to occupy the sea coast between Taranaki and Wanganui rendered an attack on the position impossible unless I had immediately abandoned the posts established in pursuance of those instructions. It was not until the middle of May, after having more than once applied to your Excellency for instructions, and after having been informed by your Excellency in reply that the services of the regular troops were not likely to be required, that I received your sanction to abandon any of the posts, but it was then too late. But for these circumstances the "Weraroa position might ere now have been in our possession." 3. In the first place, Sir D. Cameron was well aware that the war was not transfered to "Wanganui for the confiscation and occupation of territory, but that the object was the protection of British settlements, and the punishment of tribes who had been guilty of serious crimes, and were constantly fomenting disturbances in the country. 4. In the second place, Sir D. Cameron was perfectly aware that I did not postpone hostilities in the Taranaki country until after the meeting of the General Assembly, and that the delay in those operations was not unnecessary, and that it had nothing whatever to do with the question of who my Eesponsible Advisers might be. The question that I wished not to decide without the advice of a Eesponsible Ministry was, what the extent of those operations should be, as the Colony would to a great extent be liable for the cost of those operations. I was anxious that their extent, and the precise object to be aimed at should bo settled with the advice and concurrence of a Eesponsible Ministry. But this question of acting under responsible advice was in no way connected with that of whether or not operations were to be undertaken between Taranaki and "Wanganui, which had long previously openly been determined on ; or with the delay in September in carrying on those operations, which arose from a different cause. Sir D. Cameron knew that I had long previously determined that those operations should be undertaken, that the first preparations for them began in August, 1864, or early in September, and that the interruption in them from that date to the 16th of December arose from a great peril which suddenly and unexpectedly threatened Auckland. This lam fortunately able to show from Earl de Grey having been kind enough to send me a copy of the report of the Deputy-Quartermaster-General in New Zealand from the Bth of September to the 7th November, 1864, from which I extract the following statements: — " Head Quarters, Auckland, 7th November, 1864. "Immediately after the despatch of the last journal (7 th September) a very unexpected occurrence took place —the escape (on 10th September) of the whole of the Maori prisoners from Kawau, which has had a very important bearing on the political aspects, and may possibly have a serious effect on the military operations of the war. # # # # # * * * " Happily as yet no disaster has resulted from the escape of the prisoners, but as they are still at large, and have established themselves (though with professedly peaceable intentions) on. the Omaha Mountain, where they have been joined by a few other Natives, it is still quite impossible to conjecture what the result will be. "It is however satisfactory that the Northern Natives have as a rule disowned any sympathies with the escaped prisoners. " The country between New Plymouth (Taranaki) and "Wanganui was at the date of my last report the contemplated scene of the next operations to be undertaken. The escape of the prisoners, and the possible complications it might lead to in the North, would of course reduce the number of troops to be available for operations in the South, and might possibly, when the time for action came, forbid the removal of any troops whatever from the Province (Auckland). " Preparations for the intended move of troops to "Wanganui and Taranaki were commenced in the way of Commissariat arrangements, and the embarkation of the first detachment of the Transport Corps/when further progress was ordered to be suspended. 1 * 1* # # r # # # * " Now though the time favorable for active operations has arrived none can be undertaken for a month; but until the danger in the North has passed the large number of troops at present at Otahuhu, near Auckland, though inactive, are in the most convenient position, and ready for any emergency that may arise." 5. I feel satisfied that the foregoing statements made by the Doputy-Quartermaster-General from Head Quarters must satisfy everyone that Sir D. Cameron not only knew, at least in August, 1864, that I had determined that operations should be undertaken in the country between Taranaki and "Wanganui, but that the movement of troops for that purpose was commenced before the 7th September, 1864, when the operations were interrupted by a serious danger which suddenly and unexpectedly threatened the Province of Auckland. 6. But in truth Sir D. Cameron's own letters also conclusively shew that the delay of three months in the intended operations had nothing whatever to do with his not attacking the "Weraroa Pa, Many passages could be cited to prove this, but one will probably suffice taken from his letter to me of the 17th of March: — " On that occasion I explained to you why I had refrained from attacking the "Weraroa Pa when n

53

ZEALAKD TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

SL—No. 5.

I was at Nukumaru, viz., that tlie position was so formidable, and at that time occupied in such strength by the rebels, that I considered it could not be taken without serious loss to us, uncompensated by auy corresponding loss on the side of the rebels, who could at any time escape into the bush with impunity. I stated that this was the reason why I had advanced to the "Waitotara, afterwards to the Patea, and why I thought it necessary to consult you as to future operations." 7. .This conclusion was come to at the time that Sir D. Cameron was erroneously so strongly impressed with the idea of the strength of the enemy, and with the determined nature of the resistance they intended to offer, that he stated he could not advance even as far as the Patea without reinforcements from home of at least 2000 men, and it clearly had nothing to do with the delay of three months which had taken place in his proceeding from Auckland to Taranaki, and from thence to Wanganui. 8. The plea of not attacking an intrenchment occupied by only about 250 Natives, without artillery and badly armed, within a few miles of a British settlement, upon account of the winter is, in a climate such as this, difficult to understand. I believe that no other commander in New Zealand has ever gone into winter quarters ; and to leave rebels undisturbed close to Wanganui for months is a most pernicious thing. It entails a vast expense on Great Britain and upon the Colony ; it enables the rebels to form new alliances, to foment disturbances in other parts of the country, and keeps a large force uselessly locked up. About 800 British troops are now watching this intrenchment. 9. The Natives do not themselves ever think of going into winter quarters. As you will find from other letters, the fanatics are using this interval of absolute inactivity on our part to attack our allies on the East Coast, and will I have now reason to fear involve us in another war. 10.. To conduct what is really a civil war on such principles must, in my belief, ultimately involve the whole Native population in it, and gradually extend it over all New Zealand. 11. I think that even in an European territory if parties of lawless people, absolutely insignificant in number when compared to the force of the country, were allowed to remain for months in intrenchments close to towns which they continually threatened, and if the forces of the Government went into winter quarters, leaving them undisturbed, and remained inactive whilst the abettors and supporters of the rebels were in the field carrying on a civil war against loyal subjects of the Queen, the result must inevitably be a long and costly war which would gradually spread over the whole country, and could ultimately be only put an end to by fighting taking place in each part of it in succession. If such would be the case in an European territory, it would be much more so in such a country as New Zealand, where the rebels arc Natives with strong sympathies in their favor in the breasts of many of their countrymen. New Zealand is also quite unable to bear the expenses of the forces it is obliged to maintain ready for operations whilst this state of inactivity prevails, and for many months its financial ruin has from this cause apparently been slowly in process of accomplishment. I have, &c, .The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 53. COPT of Telegeam to be sent from Point do Galle. His Excellency the Goveexok to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Auckland, Bth June, 1865. "William Thompson has come in and tendered his own submission, and that of the Native King. These have been accepted. Other leading rebel chiefs have come in and are coming in. The Eight. Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. No. 54 His Excellency the Goyebnoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, "Wellington, 10th July, 1865. I have the honor to enclose a copy of a letter I have received from Sir D. Cameron, reporting that Colonel "Warre C.8., and Colonel "Weare, 50th Eegiment, on the Bth of June last, advanced from their respective posts and formed a junction on the same day without opposition thus opening the whole distance between Taranaki and AVanganui. 2. I have also the honor to enclose the copy of a report from Mr. Parris, on the same subject from which you will see what an effect these proceedings have had on the minds of the Natives, and how strong their desire for peace now is. 3. In other Despatches I have reported that the posts it was proposed to occupy to the north of the "Waitara, have all been taken up without opposition. I trust that these events will all tend to satisfy you that I was right in declining to ask for further reinforcements from England, of at least, 2,000 men, to enable the General to advance as far as the Patea, and for still larger reinforcements for the purpose of occupying posts to the north of the "Waitara Eivcr. I have, &c, The Eight Hon."Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure 1 to No 54. Lieut.-Gcneral Sir D. A. Cajiebo>" to His Excellency the Goteenoh. Sic, — Head Quarters, Auckland, 27th June, 1865. I have the honor to report that Colonel "Warre, C.8., marched with a column from near Opunake, and Colonel "Wearc from the Waingongoro, on the Bth instant, and met about halfway between i those two points on the same day, without opposition.

Me (it's I , . . 105 Redoubt . 75 Stewart's do. 108 Traflbrd's do. 77 Maxwell's Farm . . 26 Waitulura Redoubt . 207 .Xukumaru . 200 _798

T*o. 83.

54

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OP NEW

A.—No. 5.

They returned to their respective stations on the 10th instant. The distance between Opunake and the Waingongoro, is reported to be 24 miles, and not 15, as supposed by your Excellency. I have, &c, 11 D. A. Caheboh, His Excellency Sir George Grey, K.C.B. Lieut.-General. Enclosure 2 to No. 54. Assistant Native Secbetaey of Taranaki to the Hon. the Native Minister. Sin,— "Wellington, 21st June, 1865. For the information of His Excellency's Government, I have the honor to forward the following report of the expedition under the command of Colonel Warre, C.8., from New Plymouth, for the purpose of effecting a passage through the Taranaki and Ngatiruanui Districts, which expedition I accompanied. Eepoet. 1. On Monday, the sth instant, Colonel Warre, C.8., myself, and a company of Bushrangers embarked on board the s.s. " Ahuriri" and landed at Opunake the same evening. Captain Mace with about thirty of the Mounted Corps and four mounted Natives went overland, and met us at Opunake. The s.s. " Ahuriri" was sent off from Opunake the morning of the Gth instant, (after landing the Commissariat Stores brought from New Plymouth) to signal to the forces at Waingongoro, under the command of Colonel Weare, of the 50th Regiment, to advance northward. On the 7th instant a force composed of two companies of the 43rd Regiment, one company of the 70th Regiment, a company of Bushrangers, and thirty of the Mounted Force, commanded by Colonel Warre, C.8., left Opunake and marched as far as a river called Taungatara, which we found a heavy fresh in, and were not able to get the transport cart and the gun over; consequently we encamped on the north side that night, and started the next morning without any camp equipage or carts, taking only seven pack horses with us, with supplies for three days. About 3 o'clock p.m. on the Bth instant, wo met the advanced guard of the force under Colonel "Weare, 50th Regiment, at a place called Taikata, where both forces were halted, and after a communication with Colonel "Weare, which was effected by Colonel "Warre riding on to meet him, the two forces were ordered to encamp for the night about a mile apart, Colonel "Warre's at Taikata, and Colonel Weare's at Kumupuia. On the 9th instant Colonel "Warre, Deputy-Assistant-Quartermaster-General Clark, myself, and about twenty of the Mounted Force rode on to "Waingongoro, leaving the troops where they were encamped. Before starting from Waingongoro, I sent a Native whom I had brought with me from New Plymouth with a few lines to the young Ngatiruanui Chief, telling him that if he really wished to see me, I should be at Waingongoro that day to which place Colonel Warre had consented for him to come, cautioning him at the same time to come with a white flag. As we rode very fast from Taikata to Waingongoro, where Colonel Warre remained only about three hours, there was not time enough for Hone Pihamo to get in; and as Colonel Warre decided to return at once, after consulting with him, I deemed it advisable for the public service that I should remain in the District for a few days in order to give the insurgents an opportunity of communicating with me, as they had previously expressed a wish to do so. 2. Colonel Warre left Waingongoro for the return march to New Plymouth about 3 o'clock p.m. the 9th instant, and as they were passing through the Waimate District, one of the mounted^men (Richard Peed) accidentally fell from his horse, and his comrades left him (not intentionally I presume) when his horse ran inland and he followed it, and whilst doing so was captured by the insurgents near a place called Te Kauae, where the Native I had sent to them fortunately was stopping, and the next day 10th instant he came into Waingongoro to report the capture of the European, who was armed with a sword and revolver. I sent him back with a request that they would send in the European and all his accoutrements so that when we met our talk might be marama (clear, unrestrained). The following day the 11th instant, (Sunday) R. Peed was sent into me together with his horse and accoutrements, and also a pocket handkerchief with five shillings in it, which Peed insisted upon giving them for their kindness to him, but they refused to keep it, stating that it might be said they had liberated him for money. Colonel Wear's force returned from the north Saturday evening, and encamped at Waingongoro for the night. The following morning, Sunday 11th instant, resumed the return marched to Patea. 3. On Monday the 12th instant the young Chief Hone Pihama and Rapata, a young man of the Ngatimaniapoto Chiefs Tikaokao's, together with four others, came in with a letter signed by Te TJa Tito Hanatawa, Tamati Hone Oraukawa and Tauhana, (Tikaokao) which I herewith enclose, requesting me to go to Te Kauae, to meet the Natives of the district there. At first I had an objection to go there, in consequence of a recent occurrence at Watino, not more than ten miles therefrom, when some of the mounted men stationed at Opunake, who went out with Lieut.-Colonel Colville on the Ist instant, about five miles in advance of that post whilst in the act of riding after some cattle inland of the village of Watino (where they had left Lieut.-Colonel Colville and three mounted men) fell in with five natives, and engaged with them, when one of the mounted men was severely wounded, and died the following morning in camp. They left three of the Natives on the ground for dead, after taking their .arms and a mere and tomahawk ; and lest more Natives should come upon them, it was deemed advisable to return to camp at once, which they did, and then returned again with fifty men to where they left the Natives, but on their arrival there were only two Natives, the third having, as they supposed then, been taken away; but from information which I have obtained from the Natives, it appears he got away of his own accord after the mounted men retired, with six bullet wounds, and a severe battering on the back part of his head (inflicted by R. Peed, who was made prisoner). The names of the two men who were killed were Totaea and Honiana, and the one that got away was a chief called Rewa Pura, all Taranaki Natives (that section of the tribe called Titais). After a consultation with Lieut.-Colonel Butler, who was commanding at Waingongoro, I decided to go and meet the Natives at Te Kauae, and accordingly left the same day, accompanied by Captain Sir

55

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OE STATE.

A.—No 5,

Bobcrt Douglas and Lieutenant Tredennick. On. arriving at Te Kauae we were received with the most friendly demonstrations of waving of blankets and salutations from the women. On entering the village we were received by a guard of honor of about thirty armed men, who presented arms and then opened their lines (being in double file), and formed an avenue which conducted us to a small paling inclosure of about eight feet square, in which stood their niu (post), around which stood four Natives facing outwards, aud Te Ua himself stood at the entrance. We were marched around the niu, and then requested to sit down. Te Ua then turned round and looked me steadfastly in the face for about two minutes, and turning to the Natives who were standing against the post said to them, " Did you see ?" They replied, " Yes." Te Ua then said, " The Spirit has alighted upon him." He then called upon the armed party to honor the visitors, when they presented arms and were then dismissed. Te Ua then went among the other Natives, who were a short distance off, in number about two hundred men, including all the leading men of the district, and among them were three Northern chiefs — Tikaokao, a Ngatimaniapoto chief; Manuka, a Ngatiapakura chief; and Haurua, a Ngatihikairo chief. Te Ua made the first speech, and was followed by the three Chiefs before mentioned. After them Tamati Hone Oraukawa and other Ngatiruanui chiefs. The tenor of their speeches was most peaceful; in fact, I have never witnessed a stronger desire for peace since the war began. They had not heard of the submission of "William Thompson until I told them of it; but Te Ua stated, in the presence of all, that they, the people of the district, were an independent tribe, and should settle their own affairs without reference to waikato. He also repudiated the Maori King in the presence of all. He did the same when I met him the last time in 1562. 4. In addressing them, I called upon them to return and place themselves under the Government, and reminded them of a conversation I had with them in the year 1859, in the town of New Plymouth, when on their way north to attend the first great King Meeting held in Waikato, when I told them that they would regret ever moving in the question of a king for the Maori people. I asked them to show me how their ranks were filled up, and where many of the men were that I used to see among them, —explaining to them that however many we lost, that loss was always filled up by others. They asked me to explain to them what would be required of them to make peace with the Government. I told them that the only terms I knew of was for them to surrender unconditionally, and place everything they possessed under the protection of the Government; but as I had received no instructions from the Government, with reference to their particular case, I considered that it would be better for me to communicate to .the G ovemment my interview with them, before anything further was done in the matter. 5. A native named Eitimana rose and said, that if the troops were withdrawn from their district peace could be settled at once. In reply, I told them I had not come to flatter them, or to make any definite proposal to them, but that I had come to hear what they had to say. As to the removal of the troops, they must not expect that would bo done until they had satisfied the Government with terms for a permanent peace. I told them other tribes had surrendered land as payment for going to war against the Government, and that they would have to do the same ; but as to the quantity, that I was not prepared to say anything about. On returning from Te Kauae to Waingongoro, a party of about fifty young men wore ordered to get their horses and escort me to the redoubt. Some of them were mounted on very fleet horses, and rode exceedingly well: the whole were under the command of a young man named Watikingi, grandson of the old Ngatiruanui chief Te Kei Hanatawa, who was killed at Waireka, in March, 18G0. On the 13th instant the chief Hone Pihama Te Eei Hanatawa brought in a cartload of potatoes, kumeras, pumpkins, and also a quantity of tobacco of New Zealand growth, and very creditably manufactured —a present to the troops at Waingongoro, which was thankfully received, the troops having been for some time without vegetables at this post. At the request of Lieut.-Colonelßutler, I instructed the Natives to keep away from the redoubts in my absence, until some one returned from the Government to see them, which they agreed to do, and promised to remain perfectly quiet in the interim, if the troops would do the same. I arranged for Te Ua and Hone Pihama to accompany me so far as Opunake, having intended to return direct to New Plymouth overland ; but the following morning, the 14th instant, I received a message from Te Ua, telling me that he had just heard that the friends of the Natives who were killed in the engagement at Watino were assembled at that place; that he was therefore afraid it would not be safe for me to go that way. That if any injury was done to me while he was with me, he should be accused of being a party to it, the same as he had been to the murder of Mr. Volkner, which conduct he had always been opposed to. 6. Deeming it not advisable to risk too much at my first interview with them, I decided at once to go by way of Wanganui; and just as I was leaving, a Native arrived with a white flag, wishing to see mo. I went back to see him, and found he had been sent in from Weriweri and Kitemarae, to state that as Hone Pihama had been allowed to bring in a present for the troops, they wished to do the same. That they had six cartloads ready and some pigs, which they were only waiting for leave to bring in. Lieut.-Colonel Butler consented for them to do so, and I again repeated his instructions to theml —to keep away after they had brought in their present of potatoes, &c, as there would be no ene to speak to them after I had gone. 1. IMore closing this report, it is only fair to the Natives to mention a few incidents which occurred during my short stay at Waingongoro. A great number of horses had been captured by the troops in that district, and on the occasion of going to Te Kauae to meet the Natives, Lieutenant Tredennick rode upon one of them, and just before we arrived at To Kauae, one of the young men who had come to the redoubt after me remarked, " That is our horse." I felt it was a very injudicious thing to do ; but it was too late to prevent it. However, on arriving at the village, some young men were" ordered to take charge of our horses, which they did, and unsaddled them and tethered them out to feed. On leaving the place the horse was brought to Lieutenant Tredennick without a word about its belonging to them. On the morning of the 13th instant, six young men came from Kitemarae to the redoubt°all on horseback. As I was talking to them, Lieutenant Down requested me to ask them

56

DESPATCHES FEOM THE GOVEENOE OF NEW

A.—No 5.

if they had seen any horses on the track they had come ; that a mare, a colt, and a foal of his had got away in that direction. I put the question to the Natives, and they replied that they saw some horses near the bush. I then requested two of them to go with Lieutenant Down to bring them back, which they agreed to do, and lent Lieutenant Down one of their horses to ride with them. They recovered the horses and brought them back to the redoubt, when they informed me that they belonged to a Native named Edward (Emeri), but never asked to have them returned to them. I have mentioned these circumstances to show the very good feeling which seemed to prevail among them. 8. William King, Hukanui, and his brother Eeihana, chiefs of the Kaopukunui District, requested me to supply them with a Government flag for their district; but lam of opinion it would be injudicious to do so as yet. lam of opinion that many could be drawn off, and brought back to their allegiance to the Government at once, which would have to be done quietly, without any defiant demonstrations while negotiations were being carried on. 9. I left Waingongoro on the 14th instant, and arrived at Wanganui on the 15th, and after conferring with Brigadier "Waddy, C.8., and Lieut.-Colonel Logan, I decided to come on to Wellington to report without delay the favorable interview I had had with the insurgents in the Ngatiruanui District, where I beg to submit, for the consideration of His Excellency's Government the desirability of some one being sent, as early as convenient, to make known the terms of the Government for the establishment of peace with that tribe. 10. About ten o'clock on Monday night, after I had gone on board the s.s. " Wanganui," I received a letter from Lieut.-Colonel Butler, from Waingongoro, enclosing one for me from some Natives whom I had not seen, which I herewith also enclose. Those Natives belong to the Puketapu tribe, and were driven away from Mataitawa when that place was taken by Colonel Warre. I have, &c, The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. B. Paeeis, A.N.S. Enclosure 3 to No. 54*. Feiend Paeeis, — Te Kauae, 11th June, 1865. You and the General, I salute you (both). This is my message to you, O Parris. Come hither this day, that you may see your people; that here you may address (the people of) our cause; and that the tribe may express its views to you. No more. Te TJa llaumeice, Pita Hanatana, To Mr. Parris and the General, Tamati Hone, at Eangitoto, Waingongoro. Tawiiana. Enclosure 4 to No. 54. Feiend Me. Paeeis, — June IG, 1865. Greeting. Great is our arolia for you at the present time. Know you that I will fix the time (name the day) for seeing you. The tribe has seen you this day. When shall we also see you ? where shall we see you ? Tamiiiana, Hapijiana Tokeeoa, Whikitoa, To Mr. Parris, Waingongoro. . Hakopa. No. 55. His Excellency the Goveenoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaet of State for the Colonies. Sic, — Government House, Wellington, 10th July, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information the copy of a letter I wrote to W. Thompson, and of his reply, from which you will be glad to learn how strong are his expressions of gratification that peace has been made with his tribe. 2. The report he alludes to, about soldiers being stationed at Te Puna, was based upon some misapprehension which shall be removed from his mind. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Geet. Enclosure 1 to No. 55. Government House, Auckland, 30th May, 1865. Wieemtj Tamihana Te Wahaboa, — My Friend Tamihana, —The letter of the General has come to me. I have seen that you have signed a declaration of allegiance to the Queen, and you have also ceased to fight against me. It is good. lam glad. After this we will work together, so that good results may spring up in the world, for evil works to be caused to cease, but all the regulations for good will be laid down on the day when we speak face to face. From your friend, Q-. Geex, Governor. Enclosure 2 to No. 55. Matamata, 23rd June, 1865. Salutations to you, Governor, —Salutations to you, Sir Geoege Geet, — Friend, —-Tour word, approving of the peace has arrived (your word of approval for the peace has arrived). I have seen it. Yes, —that report which reached you (you received) is true. That is, the word which General Carey wrote is quite true (the word of General Carey, which was P

No. 84. Sir a. Grey to W. Thompson, 30th Jlay, 1805. W. Thompson to Sir G. Grey, 23rd June, 1865.

57

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5.

written to you is quite true). All I think is, that peace is made, —pausing (or I rest), —a breathing from the weariness and fatigue of working this evil work (war); that is, the weapons of Tv (war) have been cast down and thrown away (from us). lam sleeping (at peace) and the arms (I and the arms are at peace), the nose (edge or point) of the weapon is sleeping, is turned away, and all of that. This is a thought of mine. I heard the report of the cannon on the night of the 20th June, at nine o'clock. Friend, —send back the Europeans who are dwelling at Te Puna. I thought as the (these or my) implements of war are sleeping (at peace), that those arms should sleep also (likewise). Friend, —An enemy for whom are the soldiers and the barracks which are standing (stationed) at Te Puna? Peace being made, for whom indeed are these the enemy? (meaning—what are those soldiers stationed, and that barrack or redoubt erected at Te Puna for? Who are they to fight against? Peace having been made, there is no person for them to fight). O (Sir George) Grey, send back those soldiers, do not leave them; this is all my word of this time. From your friend, His Excellency Sir George Grey, K.C.B. Na W. T. Wahaeoa. No. 56. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, "Wellington, 10th July, 1865. I have had the honor to state in previous Despatches that the only positions left in the possession of the rebel Natives between Wanganui and Taranaki were that at Weraroa and some others near Warea, on the Taranaki side. I have now the honor to enclose a copy of a letter I have received from Sir D. Cameron, transmitting a report from Colonel Warre, C.8., containing the particulars of an attack made by a force under his command on the positions near Warea. 2. You will be glad to learn that this attack, which was gallantly made and skilfully planned, was entirely successful, and that the positions were all taken without any casualty on our side. 3. I feel sure that a consideration of what has recently been accomplished by Colonel Warre, C.8., will fully show that if, as I requested, he had been allowed to advance from Taranaki at the same time that Sir D. Cameron began his march from Wanganui, the war in New Zealand would long ere this have been entirely at an end, and that a vast expenditure would have been saved to Great Britain and the Colony. I have, &c., The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. No. 57. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Wellington, 10th July, 18G5. I have the honor to state that I propose to endeavour to comply with the expectations you have expressed to me in your Despatch No. 20 of the 27th of March last, by affording explanations as to the discrepancies between my Despatches to yourself and those of Sir D. Cameron to the Secretary of State for War. 2. I shall, however, be compelled to give these explanations under circumstances of singular disadvantage, inasmuch as I have never seen Sir D. Cameron's Despatches, and have no knowledge of their contents except such as I can gather inferentially and obscurely from your Despatch No. 20 of the 27th of March. From the enclosed correspondence you will find that Sir D. Cameron will not furnish me with copies of his Despatches to which you have referred me ; and even if I were in possession of these, I should probably know but part of the grounds on which Her Majesty's Government have formed their opinions and based their instructions to me, as I should still be left in ignorance of the contents of those confidential communications unfavorable to myself, which he now states that Her Majesty's Government have from time to time received from him. 3. I beg before proceeding to give the explanations I am thus expected to furnish, to point out how extremely undesirable it is that the system of secret correspondence thus introduced into the public service should be allowed to continue. 4. The Government and people of this Colony have made really vast efforts to aid Great Britain in the suppression of the existing rebellion here, and in placing the country in a state of security for the future. 5. To promote these objects, they have raised large sums of money and considerable bodies of men ; they have given their own services for the purpose, and some of them have laid down their lives ; they have also purchased and maintained steamers and other vessels, and have incurred a large permanent debt. From the enclosed return you will find that in the Wanganui District alone they are, in order to aid Sir D. Cameron in his operations, incurring an expenditure at the rate of £79,896 per annum. 6. It would therefore I think be reasonable to suppose —that, in consideration of their losses and sacrifices, and their vital interest in tho question —that, if the General Officer could suggest any plan of operations which would bring tho war to a speedy termination ; or if he could shew any errors in tho system of operations that was being pursued, or suggest any improvements in it, he should, for the interest of Her Majesty's subjects here, at once, on the spot, communicate them to the local authorities, so that his suggestions, if they were good, might be without delay adopted. '7. The Governor is also injured by such suggestions being withheld from him if they are good, for, he is in that case directing that operations^should be carried on upon a faulty system, whilst the means of amending this error are at hand in the possession of his proper Adviser and are'withheld from him at a fearful sacrifice to the public interests, which have during the delay which takes place been continuously conducted on an erroneous system. 8. A great injury is also inflicted on Her Majesty's Government; too probably the suggestions of

No. 85. VideN.Z.Qazeiic, 1865, No. 25, pp. 224-25.

No. BC.

Tide A. No, 4.

Enclosure JTo. 1.

58

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. K.

the General Officer, if they are concealed from the authorities on the spot, are erroneous ones, which would have been shown to be so if they were made known at a place where the light of local knowledge would disperse their errors ; and such I confidently affirm is the fact in the present instance. In such a case Her Majesty's Government may issue erroneous instructions injurious to the interests of the Queen's subjects, upon the advice of an irresponsible person, whose suggestions remain secret and uncontradicted. They by such instructions raise in the Colony feelings inimical to the Homo Government, injure the influence of their Governor who appears to be useless in the country, and embarrass the Colonial Ministry. It is probable that it the General Officer participates in colonial political feeling —the Home Government —induced to do so by secret representations, may identify themselves with one political party to the injury of another. 9. It is also probable that a still worse difficulty will arise. Their instructions will be quite inapplicable to the circumstances of the Colony, and will clearly have been based upon erroneous information or upon a want of knowledge. The Governor will therefore even in the interests of the Home Government be forced to disregard them; he will thus appear to have taken up a position of antagonism to Her Majesty's Government whilst the General Officer will appear to possess theirconfidence, and to be acting in full conformity with their views, which will really be his own secretly directed by himself. The Governor's position in the country must thus be greatly weakened, and he will find it excessively difficult to conduct its affairs successfully. 10. In so far as I can gather from your Despatch to which I am replying, it appears that General Cameron has reported that I expected from him services which would render necessary the continued presence in New Zealand of the present force, if not indeed its increase, and that this caution of his is intended especially to apply to the operations I contemplated at Taranaki. lam there informed that Her Majesty's Government confidently expect that I will not have sanctioned any operations at Taranaki which General Cameron has been unable to approve, and that no frontier will there have been established nor settlements invited which the unassisted forces of the Colony may not be trusted to defend. 11. Speaking upon this part of the subject I can only say that if I had not sanctioned operations at Taranaki, which General Cameron did not approve, I believe that that Settlement would have been ruined ; that the war would have been indefinitely prolonged ; and that the Taranaki settlers would Dot have been in the position of supporting themselves, which they are now quite prepared to do. I feel sure that the result will be admitted by all unprejudiced persons to shew the soundness of the views on which I sanctioned the proceedings at Taranaki, which have been carried out. 12. "With regard to my requiring from General Cameron services which would render necessarythe continued presence in New Zealand of the present force, if not indeed its increase, I have to observe that an investigation of the services I required from General Cameron will shew that the whole Native population between Taranaki and Wanganui, men, women, and children, was about 1,500 souls, no inconsiderable portion of whom wore friendly to our interests. 13. The distance between Taranaki and Wanganui is one hundred and twenty-eight miles, all of which, except about ninety miles, was in our possession, and along which supplies could be landed from steamers at several points. Colonel Warre, C.8., commanding at Taranaki, wished to be allowed to advance through ninety-four miles of this distance with a column of six hundred men. Tiiat this was no unmeaning bravado on his part, but simply what he could well and efficiently perform, is fully shewn by what he has recently done. This left thirty-four miles of distance for Sir D. Cameron to accomplish, eighteen miles of which, viz., from Wanganui to Waitotara, was through a perfectly well known country in our possession. The total force the Natives could have collected between Taranaki and Wanganui could not have amounted to eight hundred men, including their allies and chiefs, and males of all ages who could have held a gun. 14. The great bulk of the Natives left on the Wanganui Eiver, who would have been left in General Cameron's rear as he moved towards Taranaki, were our firm and fast friends. 15. The great bulk of the Natives left at Taranaki, who would have been in Colonel Warre's rear as he moved to Wanganui, were also our friends. IG. The force the Lieutenant-General had at his disposal, or which could at any time, in a few days have been at his disposal will be shewn by the enclosed returns of the forces at Taranaki and Wanganui, to have been in officers and men as follows — AVanganui ..... 4,459 Taranaki ..... 2,423 6,882 Besides the ordinary Militia, who could have been called out to protect their settlements. 17. Only two bodies of Natives were ever got together to oppose Sir D. Cameron, which, from statements which can be relied on, consisted the one at Nukumaru of not four hundred souls, the other near the Patca of one hundred nnd forty souls. 18. Sir D. Cameron, however, it now appears from your Despatch of the 27th of March r had written to Her Majesty's Government informing them that I expected from him services which would render necessary the continued presence in New Zealand of the present force, if not indeed its increase; and upon the 30th of January last, following up these views, he wrote to me informing mo that the engagement at Nukumaru had shown that the Natives had concentrated a large force, and were likely to offer the most determined resistance to his advance through a difficult country ; and he recommended that I should apply by the first opportunity for a reinforcement of at least two thousand men, and for a still larger reinforcement if, in addition to the occupation of the country between Wanganui and the Patea, the road between Taranaki and Wanganui was to be opened, and more land to be confiscated and occupied north of the Waitara. 19. And again on the 11th of February, Sir D. Cameron wrote to me from the Waitotara, informing me that there was no person of authority at Wanganui to represent the Government, and that he recommended that myself and some member of the Government should repair there as quickly as possible, tomake

Enclosure No. 2.

59

ZEALAND TO TIIE SECRETARY OE STATE.

A.—No. 5,

ourselves acquainted with the state of affairs, and judge whether my instructions could be carried out consistently with the safety of the Settlement, or whether they were to be carried out at any risk. 20. The reinforcements thus asked for, would have raised Sir D. Cameron's force in officers and men at "Wanganui alone, (to open the last sixteen miles of road to the Patea River), to upwards of six thousand five hundred, and including Taranaki, to upwards of nine thousand officers and men. 21. I felt it to be my duty to decline to ask for the reinforcements applied for, which I judged to be obviously unnecessary, and I did not think it right that any stop in the operations entered on should take place. Had I consented to the applications made, and had I stopped operations until reinforcements of at least two thousand men had arrived from England, rebellions would have broken out in other parts of the Island, and an enormous useless expenditure of money and loss of life would have been incurred. 22. Sir D. Cameron's views were however entirely discrepant from mine. On tho 15th of March he informed me as follows: —-"All the reasons you mention for deciding not to apply for reinforcements, are to my mind the strongest reasons why they should be applied for.'.' And he plainly accused me of being ready to incur almost any risk to get immediate possession of the Waitotara Block, although such an idea had never in any form presented itself to my mind, of allowing a war to be carried on for the profit and gratification of the colonists; and I was informed that the question of the loss of British officers and soldiers, was one that never sufficiently entered into my calculations; and other similar remarks were made. If anything could have at once alarmed and dispirited troops, it was knowing that their commander believed that they were opposed to a numerous and determined enemy, with whom they were unable to cope without being reinforced by at least two thousand men; and that the man who sent them on this service was reckless of the lives of British officers and soldiers, and was thus prepared to sacrifice their lives for the profit and gratification of the Colonists. 23. My position was necessarily a most painful one. The plan of operations I wished to be carried out, and which the result has shown would have finished the war in a month or six weeks, was rejected as absurdly impracticable. Not only was this done, but I was subjected in letters to remarks of the most cutting kind, because I would not suspend operations until a useless and unnecessary force could be collected and brought to bear upon an enemy who could under no circumstances exceed eight hundred in number, and of whom certainly not much more than half could have been brought to bear on any one point; and whilst this was taking place at one end of the line (Wanganui), the officer at the other end of the line (Taranaki) was oiTering to open the road three-fourths of the distance between the two places with only GOO men. 24. Although therefore Sir D. Cameron did not approve of these operations, and in this respect I acted contrary to your wishes, I deemed it my duty to you to hold to my views. The result has been that Sir D. Cameron only encountered one hundred and forty men, whilst the only other Natives in his direction arc about two hundred and thirty-four in the Wereroa Pa, and that Colonel Warre has achieved every object I proposed to attain on his side without losing an officer or man, so that in practice I have not been found to be so disregardful of the lives of British officers and soldiers as I was stated to be. 25. Looking at tho present state of things, I would only request you to consider what it would now have been if in February last I had suspended operations at Wanganui, and we were now hero awaiting the arrival of additional reinforcements from England of at least two thousand men, whilst rebellion had broken out in several parts of the country; and what would have been said to me for refusing to direct a movement into a country defended by less than eight hundred badly armed men, until a British force had been augmented from nearly seven thousand to nearly nine thousand officers and men. Great Britain can bear up against an enormous expenditure of this kind so uselessly entailed upon her, but a Colony like New Zealand must have its resources so destroyed by it, that it is difficult to see how it can hereafter provide for its own defence. Had the General Officer here been required to acquaint me with the nature of his reports to the Secretary of State for War, on which such an expenditure was justified, I feel confident that I could by my remarks have saved large sums to tho British Treasury and to the Colony. I have, &c, a. geet. The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P.

60

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5,

Enclosure to Despatch No. 86. RETURN of AVERAGE MONTHLY EXPENSE incurred by the COLONY in MILITARY OPERATIONS at WANGANUI, for the Three Months ending 30th JUNE, 1865.

61

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OE STATE.

Staff— Major Commanding Adjutant Quartermaster Surgeon Paymaster Sergeants, &c... £ s. d. 28 10 0 22 12 6 14 5 0 22 10 0 22 10 0 63 0 0 £ s. d. 173 7 6 Yeomanry Cavalry — Captain Cornet Sergeants Corporals Trumpeters Troopers 1 1 3 G 2 G5 30 0 0 IS 15 0 42 15 0 45 0 0 15 0 0 390 0 0 511 10 0 Native Contingent — Captain Commanding Native Officers Native Adjutant G-uides Privates 1 6 1 7 85 27 15 0 97 0 0 14 5 0 45 15 0 318 15 0 503 10 0 Forest Rangers —■ Major Captain ... ... ... ... .... Lieutenants ... Ensigns Sergeants Corporals Privates 1 1 2 2 5 8 88 30 0 0 30 0 0 42 0 0 36 0 O 56 5 0 72 0 0 549 10 0 815 15 0 Military Settlers — Captains Lieutenants ... Knsigns Assistant Surgeon Sergeants Privates 2 2 3 1 9 161 43 15 0 28 10 0 37 2 6 11 5 0 47 5 0 603 15 0 774 12 6 Patea Rangers — Captains Lieutenants Ensigns ... ... ... ... ... , ... Sergeants Corporals Pay Sergeants Privates 2 2 2 7 11 2 114 57 16 6 40 10 0 36 15 0 17 5 0 66 0 0 15 0 0 597 10 0 860 17 6 3,669 12 6 Pecuniary: Lodging and Forage Allowance Allowance in lieu of Rations Friendly Natives Barer Transport 350 7 6 1,033 15- 0 380 0 0 100 0 0 1,864 2 6 £5,533 15 0 This does not include about 300 men employed in the Commissariat Transport Corps, who cost the Government 2s. Gd. per head per day 1,125 0 0 Making the Total Monthly Expenditure ... £6,658 15 0

Waxcaxvi District. Officers and Men. Taeaxaki District. Officers and Men. Royal Artillery .:. Royal Engineers 1 ... Military '.Train Transport Corps 1st Battalion, 12th Regiment ... 2nd „ 14th Regiment ... 2nd „ ISth Regiment ... 40th Regimen! ■);J;'J Light Infantry Regiment ... 50th „ 67th ,, 65th „ 68th „ Yeomanry Cavalry ... Forest Rangers Military Settlers Pates Rangers 133 34 89 412 1 508 869 1 2 821 880 2 274 78 107 78 104 Royal Artillery Koyul Engineers Transport Corps 43rd Light Infantry 57th Regiment 70th Regiment Tai-anaki Military Settlers Xai'anaki Militia 46 10 79 701 18 720 687 153 Total Total 4,459 2,123 Defence Office, Wellington, 7th July, 1865. H. A. ATKixsoy. Q

A.—No. 5,

Enclosure to Despatch No. 86. WANGANUI DISTRICT. —Strength and Distribution of the Troops on 31st May, 1865.

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

62

Distei: irnoN. Strength. I I CO li II 0Q i s '3 I i—* 7i ■ E ■ O 3-5 I 8.SP Si Z h I ■3 C | C o =3.2 i as ■i -7: i ■z 6 i a £ i Brigade Staff— General Officer Field Officers Other Officers Medical Staff— Staff Sergeant! ... Military Store — Staff Sergeants ... Purveyor — Staff Commissariat — St-i ' Sergeants ... Rank and File irmy Hospital Corps — Sergeants ... Rank and File Royal Artillery — Field Officers Captains ... Subalterns... Staff Bergeanti ... Drummers... Rank and File Roi/al Engineers — Field Officers Captains ... Subalterns... Sergeants ... Rank and File M Salt., \2th Foot— Rank and File >.nd Bait., VUhFoot— Field Officers Captains ... Subalterns... Staff Sergeants ... Drummers... Rank and File '.nd Salt., ISth Foot— Field Officers Captains ... Subalterns,.. Staff Sergeants ... Drummers... Rank and File \Oth FootHank and File [3rd Foot — Rank and File iO/A Foot— Field Officers Captains ... Subalterns... Staff Sergeanta ... Drummers... Rank and File Tith Foot— Field Officers Captains ... .Subalterns... Staff Sergeants ... Drummers... Rank and File 55/A Foot — Rank and File 58M Foot— Field Officers Captains ... Subalterns... 2 3 2 3 15 8 217 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 4 2 10 i 3 2 3 8 1 i 2 1 i i i 3 1 i is 3 2 ... 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 9 1 1 1 1 5 40 1 1 1 2 21 5 1 5 i 1 i l i 3 8 "• ... 1 ... "" 2 3 i 2 1 9 1 3 2 2 5 3 24 2 10 1 1 3 1 9 2 116 1 1 1 2 29 1 2 5 6 3 23 12 457 3 2 100 8 2 70 i ... '" i '"I ... 12 21 "i ...I lie 18 ...! 1 1 2 2 43 i l 3 2 98 2 3 1 68 1 2 4 1 9 6 184 i 3 6 4 102 1 2 6 3 12 5 200 3 2 6 17 5 38 20 781 3 17 8 L8 23 18 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 9 6 181 1 3 8 3 17 7 330 1 1 J i 3 5 3 M i i 3 2 58 i 2 7 17 4 35 19 737 si 4 3 i 22 1 3 6 1 11 7 220 "a 2 1 2 5 3 M i 3 5 2 121 1 4 5 1 14 7 2G1 "i 3 2 9 16 2 45 20 786 22 5 20 1 18 88 1 2 1 4 G 1 4 7 "i

A—No. 5.

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

63

Enclosure to Despatch No. 8' Wiir&ANtri District. — Strength and Distribution o: (continuea). the Troops on 31s*t May, 1803. DlSTKI iUTIOX. Steenoth. I CO o M is o S •^ o o S"E| c3 I E 2 • ill £ I 1 !■ pi 11 L5-e rgfl 2 g M 02 i o 6 a Sergeants ... Drummers... Rank and File ",-ansport Corps — Captains ... Subalterns... Staff Sergeants ... Drummers... Rank and File ililitary Train — Captains ... Subalterns... Staff Sergeants ... Drummers... Rank and File 10 7 222 2 13 7 242 10 5 5 4 1 4 105 1 8 2 18 3 278 1 12 1 22 4 403 i 2 i 4 12 1 1 1 3 1 29 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 78 :s "2 21 21 2 ... I I 1 1 Votal — Field Officers Captains ... Subalterns ... Staff Sergeants ... Drummers... Rank and File 5 11 18 6 47 30 KS6 i 1 2 1 2 i 1 1 1 2 4 1 9 6 184 1 3 2 5 14 6 29 12 530 i 1 i 3 2 3 1 3 1 4 5 1 14 7 261 1 2 ai 63 14 15-2. IS 3009' ■i 3 2 98 3 1 69 3 2 100 3 2 70 i 6 4 102 5 3 96 8 5 164 5 2 121 2 1 82 9 1 89 53 24 17 5 61 4 20' Takaxaki. —St: :ngt! 'istribut: ion of the Troops (. Regular and klilitia) on list ay, 1865 Distribution. Northern Outposts. South* Outposts. Town. Strength". I s ra n ■ o = c X 111 3^ .,1 el •^ 1 a ! I — i I I I >. L i k II c p I II i T 1 a i - = 'B ■g.1 £ a is li t§1 li ;sS! Royal Artillery — Captains... Sergeants Rank and File Royal Engineers — Subalterns Rank and File 43rd FootField Officers Captains... Subalterns Staff Sergeants Drummers Rank and File o7th Foot— Rank and File 70th FootField Officers Captains... Subalterns Staff Sergeants Drummers Rank and File T. Military Settlers — Field Officers Subalterns Staff Sergeants Drummers Rank and File T. Militia— Captains... Subalterns Staff 1 17 1 5 1 1 1 4 12 3 143 4 3 8 4 25 6 333 ... •5 1 ... ... ... ... '"1 a1 ... '" ... 2 ■" ... i 3 1 1 '2 27 2 2 IS i 1 \ 1 2 8 1 10 8 186 1 8 1 3 7 7 G 175 "i 2 i i 10 4 2 1 "i •.. i 3 e 1 is 1 3 42 1 9 3 8 19 5 35 20 611 18 4 6 18 4 44 16 639 i ... 1 ... ... i 2 — "' ... 1 ... 99 3 r in 4 2 79 2 2 ... ■" 27 1" 1 1 2 "4 2 "5 ■i 10 12 2 1 4 5 "i "2 "2 "2 "i\ 1 1 ... "2 2 "3! 3 2 ... 2 23 5 37 4 616 .; 3 11 54 "5 "2 ... i 1 39 3 1 "s •• 4 1 72 '43 1 81 78 40 ... id 1! I - 24 18 71 "l 1 ":s 2 1 i IS ... 2 2 1 ... 2 "i '" 3 5 1 ... •" "' ... ... ...

A—No. 5.

Ko. 58. His Excellency the Goyeknoe to the Eight Hon. the SXCSXTABX of State for the CoLOnxs. Sin, — Government House, Wellington, 13th July, 1865. Adverting to your Despatch No. 20, of the 27th of March, and to the instructions Sir D. Cameron informs me he has received from Earl de Grey, by which the determination of the period of time at which five Regiments can be safely withdrawn from New Zealand without endangering the results which it is the policy of Her Majesty's Government to secure for this country is removed from the hands of the Governor and his Responsible Advisers, and intrusted to the discretion of General Cameron: I have the honor to report that Sir D. Cameron, having told me that he should bo glad to know my views with reference to this reduction as soon as convenient, I informed him as you will find from the correspondence herewith enclosed that my view of the course which ought to be taken in the present condition of the Colony was "that a sufficient force should be collected with the least delay practicable to take the Weraroa Pa, in such a manner as, if possible, to secure a marked and decided success on our part. That the Local Government should then, occupying as it would an advantageous position, attempt to come to terms with the leading rebel chiefs, which I believe it could speedily do, and that then, as a consequence naturally and properly following this pacification of the country, the proposed reduction of the troops should be promptly carried out; the Colony having in the interim made such arrangements as it thought necessary for raising additional local forces, to take the place of the troops which arc to be sent home. In this way I thought etfect might safely be given to the instructions of Her Majesty's Government." 2. I find however from Sir D. Cameron's letter of the 21st of June, and from his other letters that ho has resolved not to give effect to the opinions which I have expressed. 3. From other letters which will be enclosed to you in another Despatch, you will find that a small body of fanatics being allowed to remain unassailed in the Weraroa Pa, close to the town of Wanganui is exercising a most pernicious effect upon the Colony, and may too possibly involve us in another war. 4. I had hoped that as the General had so determinedly refused to allow the regular forces to undertake operations for the capture of this place, that it might have been taken by our local forces and our Native allies —the latter of whom are accustomed to operations of this nature. But you will find from the enclosed copies of letters that the Military authorities refused to allow them to enter on operations for this purpose, and in pursuance, I presume, of instructions issued by Sir D. Cameron, ordered them to retire to the Wanganui side of the Kai Iwi stream. I had reasons to believe that the small body of fanatics in the pa when they found we were determined to attack them would have at once surrendered to our friendly Natives, and negotiations were commenced for this purpose. That theso reasons were not without good foundation is proved by information from a totally different quarter from that from which my own was derived, as Colonel Warre, in his letter from Taranaki of tiie 23rd of June, states : —" The Natives occupying the AVeraroa Pa have quarrelled amongst themselves, and many of them have left. Some of the hapus of the Ngatiruanuis are almost entirely destroyed, and all are anxious to make terms with His Excellency." But you will find from the enclosed letter that these negotiations were broken off, the Military authorities having stated that no terms of surrender could be settled without the sanction of the senior Military Officer of the Southwestern District. •3. It is thus evident that the proceedings of Sir D. Cameron, when viewed in connexion with jour instructions and those of Earl de Grey in reference to the withdrawal of the troops, render me entirely powerless in this matter.

No. sn.

Sir P. Cameron to Sir G. Grey, 9th May. Governor in reply, lltli May. Gtoneral, 12th May. Q-OTernor, 12th May. General, 13ih May. Governor, 19th May. General, 26th May. Governor, 27th May. General, 81si May. Govei nor, 2nd Juue. General. Srcl Jlllli". Ilt'lV'W itl).

Herewith.

Sfcrewit h.

64

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

Enclosure to 1 despatch Xo. 8G (continued.) Takanaki. —St: ■ength ami Distribution of the Troops (Eegular and Militia) on 31st May, 186; Disthibctio^. JVoj-Wi. vm Oi •Ijidsl. Southern Outposts. Toi ivn. Strength. si- 1 ■jii IS j5 11 1^ ||| 3 a f 5 g j ii DC "ili || a La i a, § 811 11 o 11 Hi I _ ,JM i. 3D o Sergeants Drummers Rank and File ■C. T. Corps— Captains... Subalterns Sergeant* Drummers Rank and File 'Total — Field Officers Captains... Subalterns Staff Sergeant* Drummeri Bank and File 9 3 70 1 1 1 43 ...i... 1... 9..'. r.;;;; l! ... i ! I \YZ j 1 ... :', ... ... 3 4... ... i'.'.'.L'. ... 2...!... Z"iz'.'.'. ...63 '.'.'. 1 ... '.'.'. 15... :::,::: ...j | .. "; 2... ... i ... ...20... 12 1 1 15 "f 1 "o ... *8 I ::: ::: i Z'JZ Z. l'."l zzc>::. i i ZZ.C.l '.'.. ... ... :::p:::::: i:-:\z :i s s If! "I •••! i "1 1 129 1 1 3 1 73 2 4 9 8 37 9 176 !, ] ... £ 2.. 2... 19... 1 2 8 1 10 8 ISO 1 4 9 i j ;;: a 1 2 I 2 5 14 37 9 79 36 12(38 (i 3 99 11 8 26 1 ... 2 I 28L. ... '.'.'. 16 G 3 27 Lieut. -Genera D A. Cam IN. J. D. Bakeb, Ca in, D.A.A.

A.—No. 5.

6. My Responsible Advisers, as you will find from the enclosed Memorandum which they have transmitted to me, affirm in reference to these proceedings, that, whilst they reiterate their feelings of respect for the gallant British army now in (his country, they arc of opinion thai its forced inaction renders it a source of weakness to the Colony, and rather retards than promotes that peace which it was their hope ere this to have established. They believe that the political action of the military officer commanding has resulted in fresh embarrassment and detriment to the public service, and they again urge the withdrawal of the land forces from New Zealand. 7. Under these circumstances I have written to Sir D. Cameron, and have informed him that I withdraw' any advice that I may have given to him in reference to the removal of the troops, although the views I have expressed regarding the condition of the Colony and the impolicy of his proceedings are only confirmed by recent events, and that I altogether withdraw from a matter in which no power whatever has been left to me by him, and in which my opinions are entirely disregarded ; and that I enclose him a copy of the Memorandum of my Responsible Advisers regarding the withdrawal of the troops, as embodying the wishes of the Ministers of the Colony of New Zealand, and I beg that he will without delay act on his own discretion in regard to the instructions which he has received from Earl de Grey on the subject of the withdrawal of the troops from New Zealand. I have, &c, The Right Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Grey. Enclosure 1 to No. 58. Major Rookes to the Deputy Assistant Adjutant-General. Sic,— District Militia Office, Wanganui, 21st June, 1865. I have the honor to state that I this day marched the troops of Yeomanry Cavalry, under Captain Percy, and the Native Contingent, under Captain McDonnell, and stationed them on -the Okehu Cliffs, just above the cutting, and commanding the approaches to and from Nuluimaru ; and until it is decided what is to be done with this force, I purpose (if the Brigadier-General has- no objection) that they should remain here. I have, &c., The Deputy Assistant Adjutant-General, C. C. Rookes, Wanganui. Major commanding Wanganui Militia District. Enclosure 2 to No. 58. Major Rookes to the Government Agent, Wanganui. Sib,— District Militia Office, Wanganui, 22nd June, 1865. I transmit herewith the copy of a letter received from Captain McDonnell, commanding Native Contingent, which perhaps you will submit to the Brigadier commanding, and inform me what his orders are in respect of the same. I have, &c, C. C. Rookes, The Government Agent, Wanganui. Major commanding Wanganui Militia District. Captain McDonnell to Major Rookes. Sic,— Camp Okchu, 21st June, 1865. I have the honor to communicate to you that the Maoris are most anxious to go tothe Weraroa Pa; they have to-day sent two messengers demanding immediate peace, and upon their return will start at once, when I shall feel bound to follow them. I have, &c, Thos. McDonnell, Captain commanding Native Contingent. To Major C. C. Rookes. P.S. —It is with great difficulty that I have prevented their departure to-day. Enclosure 3 to No. 58. Major Yon Tempskt to the Hon. Colonial Secretary. Mt Dear Sir,- — Opposite Weraroa, 24th June, 1865. According to your instructions, I planned, in conjunction with Rookes and McDonnell-, an early advance upon the Weraroa. The Imperial Government would not let the Natives come to Nukumaru, and Logan did his best to prevent this movement \, he ordered them to Woodall's Redoubt, into an untenable and useless position. He sent them to Okehu, whence the Natives started yesterday for Pakaraki. I was to have joined them in the evening here ; Logan cut off their Commissariat in the mean time. Messenger sent by chief Paipai (who accompanied McDonnell) reported that the pa intended to surrender to iis. In the meantime a white flag was flown from the pa, and we hurried last night here. Colonel Trevor demanded my company to the pa ; I sent men into the bush, waited for McDonnell, but the night coming on, and the Natives not making their appearance, we rode up to the palisading of the pa, where a message from McDonnell awaited me, to say that in the morning he would settle everything. We returned ; in the night McDonnell went up to the pa and got some rebel Natives to come to his camp. They then said they would give up the pa to him. In the morning Colonel Logan arrived here with his own messengers, and has now spoilt the whole thing. The Natives at once became suspicious, and are now holding back. They may yet surrender, but they will only do it to McDonnell and his chiefs. Logan has just behaved as I expected, first thwarted active measures, and then tried to avail himself of their results. I have, &c, The Hon. F. A. Weld, Wellington. G. P. Ton Teitpsky. P.S.—McDonnell sends the letter of their submission enclosed. P.S.—Answer of the Weraroa unfavourable. The Contingent then decided to fight. I inquired c R

Vide A. No. 1, pp. 16, 17.

65

ZEALAND TO THE SECEETAEY OE STATE.

A.—BTo. 5.

Colonels Trevor and Logan whether I should support in case of disaster. No! the Contingent would attack alone. Logan forced McDonnell to keep them back by the word (order) of the Governor. In consequence of all which I hereby tender my resignation of my command. G. P. Vox Teupsky. Enclosure 4 to No. 58. Captain McDowell to His Excellency the Goyebitob. Sic,— Wanganui, 26th June, 1866. I have the honor to enclose a letter from certain chiefs in the "Weraroa Pa, which will be delivered to you by Ilori Kingi, Tamate, Mete Kingi, Kawana Paipai. They will explain to your Excellency all matters connected with the events that have transpired during the last week. I am credibly informed that had the Natives not been restrained by Colonel Logan from attacking, the pa would have surrendered, as preparations were being made for its evacuation by the rebels. Captain and Adjutant Boss, who was present with Major liookes, with the Natives, before the pa, accompanies the chiefs herein named, and will wait with them on your Excellency immediately on their arrival. I have, &c, Thos. McDoxnell, His Excellency Sir George Grey, K.C.B. Captain commanding Native Contingent. Enclosure 5 to No. 58. Colonel "Wabee to the Assistant Military Secketaey. Sin,— New Plymouth, 23rd June, 1865. In continuation of my report dated the 18th instant, I have the honor to inform the Lieut.General that by the arrival of Hanuka, a rebel Native, who with his wife and four children came up from Waimate on the 20th instant by the road at the back of the mountain, and surrendered to Major Saltmarshe, at Te Arei, I have received information that the Natives named in the margin were killed in the skirmish with the wounded men near Opuraki, on the Ist instant. All these Natives belong to the Titai section or hapu of the lower Taranaki tribe. I am also informed that Tikaokao, the Mokau chief, with eighty followers, has offered to surrender to Mr. Parris, and to return peaceably to his own district if the Governor will consent to these Natives coming back with Mr. Parris. It appears that the Ngatiruanuis are very tired of the war, and are very seriously alarmed at the return of the troops to Nukumaru. The Natives occupying the Weraroa Pa have quarrelled amongst themselves, and many of them have left. Some of the hapus of the Ngatiruaauia are almost entirely destroyed, and all are anxious to make terms with His Excellency. I have also learnt that the body of Private Jury, 43rd, was not recovered ; nothing was left on it but a shirt, and it was thrown into a swamp, whore it has hitherto escaped detection. I have no information from "Warea since the destruction of the rebel Natives' position at that place on the 13th instant. The Natives are supposed to have now congregated further down the coast, at or near Waitaha. I have, &c, H. J. Waeee, The Assistant Military Secretary. Colonel commanding at Taranaki. P.S.— The enclosed letter was received from Opuraki last night after the mail steamer left for Auckland. The writer, Ngamoki, is not known, but he evidently alludes to the letter forwarded in my confidential report of the 18th instant. Captain Horan also reports from Opuraki, date 22nd June, that the men who arrived with Ilori Pihana on the 15th instant, and were allowed to communicate with Mauihi, returned on the 18th, but the eight men who went on to Warea had not returned. These Natives confirm the first statement, —that all the Natives on this coast (the Taranaki Natives) are willing to come in and make peace. In the absence of Mr. Parris, I have considerable difficulty in communicating with the Native* down the coast. H. J. Wabbe, Colonel commanding at Taranaki. Enclosure 6 to No. 58. Sin,— Wellington, 2Sth Juno, 1865. With reference to a conversation I had with you this day, as to the business before the Weraroa Pa on the 21th instant, I have the honor to inform you that Lieut.-Colonel Logan told Major Eookes in my hearing that, " Of course no terms of surrender could be settled without the sanction oi Brigadier-General Waddy," referring to the negotiations for peace then going on between the friendly chiefs and the rebels at Weraroa. I have, &c, The Hon. the Colonial Secretary. Alfeed Eoss, Captain and Adjuvant, AY.M.D. Enclosure 7 to No. 58. Goveexor Geey,— Wanganui, 27th June, 1865. That is a word of mine to you respecting the difficulty between the Militia (Native Contingent) and the soldiers who arc carrying this dispute—Colonel Logan, Charles Broughton, and Colonel Waddy ; but two of them are going to you. Arapeta Eoti, Hori Kingi, Kawana Tawhitorongi, Mete Kingi, and Tamati Puna arc going to give expression to our side of the story. The cause of this jealousy is our going to Te Weraroa. Had not this trouble been occasioned by

1. Totaiw (chief.) 2. Pcrewa. 3. Rcvra Pura. 4. An old man.

66

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5-

Charles Broughton and Colonel Logan, we had got to the pa; for Hori Kingi was not willing that any other Pakeha, save McDonnell, should accompany us to the pa —that is, to Weraroa. So then it was on account of jealousy that Hori Kingi and McDonnell did not enter into the pa. On account of that did Pehimano'speak to us, that he should come to you with the letter of those people ; that letter was to Hori Kingi and others. Ended, Kepa Bangihiwlnui, Captain. No. 59. His Excellency the Governor to the Eight Hon. the Secretary of State for the Colonies. Sir, — Government House, Wellington, 14th July, 1865. I have the honor to transmit for your information copies of the letters noted iv the margin, showing that war parties are moving from several points to encourage the fanatics left in the pa at Weraroa to hold out and aid them, and also showing that the fanatics who were despatched from the Weraroa Pa to the East Coast, and who aided in the murder of Mr. Yolkner, have raised a part of the population there, and are attacking those Natives who are friendly to us. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Gret. Enclosure 1 to No. 59. Herbert S. Wardell, E.M., to the Hon. the Natite Minister. Sik, — Wairarapa, 2Sth June, 1865. Eeferring to my letter of the 20th instant, I have the honor to report that Ngairo left Kohikutu on the 22nd instant for Waitotara, accompanied by Wi Waka, Matiaha Mokai, Te Wenerci of Ngatirangitataiu, and others, amongst whom was a son of To Manikera's. I enclose for your information copies of letters from Te Ua and Wi Hapi, which have come into my possession. Te Eangihiroa and party are still at Hinewaka. I have, <fee., The Hon. the Native Minister, Wellington. Herbert S. Wardell, E.M. To Karaitiana, — Tainui, Kenana, 7th June, 1865. Friend, —Salutations to you ! This is a question of mine to you about the reports from your place, which we have heard that the Maoris and Europeans are disputing about the Hau Pai Marire. Friends! This is my word. Harken! That work must be included iv the work of the Governor, for Te TJa's and the General's day is at hand. All things in dispute about the name of the Hau Pai Marire must be taken to Waitotara, for that is the time the disputes will be (made) right or wrong. Enough, Na Wi Hapi.

No. 90. \V. Wardeil, 28th June. Horopapera, 20th June. ' Jlokena to Mr. ) Halse, 29th Junef Mokcna to Mr. McLean, 29th Jimc. Wikiriwhi, 29th June. Mohi Turei, 29th June. 11.-iuiro Pota, June, 1865. t Wi Hapi to Karai- . tiane, 7th June. Wi Hapi to Ngairo , 7th June. ' Te TJa to chiefs, &c, 26th April.

Tainui, Kenana, 7tli June, 1865. To Ngairo and the BrotAX'GA also, —■ Friends, —Salutations to you under the influence of Eura, that is the Pai Marire. Hearken. My second mail has returned which I despatched to Te TJra; he returned from Taupo. Wutiki arrived, and Wiremu Te Eangianake has also arrived; they came to fetch me. When the days of Juno have expired I will go with my followers. They will number one hundred or fifty. If affairs are satisfactory at your place, you must go to Te Weraroa. The "pooti" (probably post) to your place has been stopped by me; the reason is, that To Tiu has gone to Weraroa, but when wo return from there we will --pooti." You must come with my children when this letter reaches you. On the 12th day I will return to Kai-iwi. I will go perhaps before the end of June. You must come iv the meantime, lou can look at Te TJa's letter. Enough, from your friend, Wirejiu Ham Witi Patati. "Weraroa, Waitotara, 26th April, 1865. My dear friends who are living to the South, thence to the East Coast —Maoris and Europeans,— live quietly. If the Maoris and Europeans wish, they must come here to witness my work and the General's. Friends,—let the Maoris and Europeans live quietly, Pai Marire. Friends, —the Maoris who have died, number futy-three; the Europeans who have died, are numberless. These Maoris died at all the battles at Waitotara. To the Chiefs of Eangitikci, Manawatu, Otaki, Porirua, Wellington, Heretaunga, Wairarapr. From Te Ua Hatjaiene, From Takana Tikaokao. Enclosure 2 to No. 59. Putiki Wharanui, 29th June, 1865. To McDonnell, Hoki Kingi, Mete Kingi, Tamati, Kawana, — Friends, —A letter has come from Noa te Eauhihi to let us know of the army of N gatikahungunn, At iawa and Ngai iraukawa, which are coming by way of Otara on the Ist July ; they intend making an advance towards Weraroa. From me, HOROPAPERA.

67

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

A.—No. 5,

Enclosure 3 to No. 59. Fbiexd Mr. Halse, — "Waiapu, 29th June, 1865. Salutations. Tour letter of sth May has reached me, informing me of your having sent some of the Governor's Proclamations affecting the Pai Marire. Do you hearken :we have now suffered two great reverses at the hands of the Hau Haus, and twice has the love of Mr. McLean been manifested to us ; but you all (Government) have not evinced any feeling for me —that is, for my people. Your doing is continued caution towards me. When have I done otherwise than have lived quietly upon the law of the Queen, that you should regard me with suspicion, and my tribe also ? But now therefore, O friend, join you all together with Mr. McLean in taking thought for us ; send us soldiers, and everything required in fighting. The Hau Haus of Taranaki and elsewhere are here carrying their word into effect with regard to us, viz.: that we be annihilated. But now be quick—be quick—be very quick. Your loving friend, Mokexa, WIKIBIWHI MATEHE, Aeapeta Haenga, Hamioka Tamakui, Houepa Te Kore, Mr. Halse, "Wellington. Hotexe Te Horo. Enclosure 4 to No. 59. To Me. McLean,— Waiapu, 29th June, 18G5. My dear friend, —Salutations to you. The steamer has been here to look at us. O my friend, we have suffered defeat, but our greatest disaster is the taking of the pa by the Hau Hau ; but what of it, the Hau Haus have fallen, many of them have fallen. Now, O friend, quickly send some soldiers to assist us. Let them come quickly, at once ; and the munitions of war likewise. May God protect us. Your loving friend, Mokena. Enclosure 5 to No. 59. To Mb. MoLlAir,— Waiapu, 29th June, 18G5. My beloved friend: I salute you. The steamer has come hither to look after us. Friend we have had a collision, but greater has been the loss of the Hau Haus. Speedily send hither some soldiers to reinforce us ; make haste, lose no time. From your loving friend, WiKinrwni. Enclosure 6 to No. 59. To Me. McLeax,— Waiapu, 29th June, 18G5. My beloved friend, I salute you. The steamer arrived on this day. Know you that we have fallen ? It occurred on the 27th instant. Our pa, Tikitiki, has been captured by the Hau Haus— that is to say (they have retaken) the pa which we captured from them. This was a smart affair: our loss was eight killed and four wounded. The women and children were all captured by the Hau Haus ; however, the Hau Haus lost many more than we did. This is my word to you —that is to say, from the whole (loyal) community : Do you manifest your sympathy with us, for the whole body of Hau Haus, from Taranaki even unto Opotiki, have gathered together to (attack) Waiapu ; they have all come hither to fight against us. Send hither some soldiers or militia to assist us. Let them come at once—speedily ; lose no time. Send also a supply of arms and ammunition. 0 Friend McLean, let your appeal to the Council (Runanga) be very urgent, that they would very speedily send hither some soldiers and everything necessary for carrying on this war. Farewell, O my beloved friend ; may God protect us together, and preserve us in the midst of the confusion which has fallen upon His Church. From your loving friend, Mom Tueei. 1 appreciate the expression of your friendly feelings toward me, and pray God to protect you also. Enclosure 7 to No. 59. To Me. McLeax,— Tuparoa, June, 18G5. My loved friend, I salute you! Here are we engaged upon the work which has come upon us. There has been a collision ; of the Hau Hau four were lulled; one of them was a chief, Neho, a grandson (nephew) of Te Mokena, and a younger brother (cousin) to me. One of the loyal Natives was wounded in the leg (or foot) ; Mr. Deighton and myself are still awaiting the arrival of the steamer, that we may speedily receive intelligence, and feel relieved. The loyal Natives have assembled together; one pa is at Tuparoa, another at Waiapu ; that is to say, at Tikitiki. The fighting pa is at Tuparoa, and the pa for communicating with the steamers. The loyal Natives of Uawa and along the coast to Tokomaru are living peaceably ; they cannot pass through to Waiapu because the Maori king party of Tokomaru have "kati'd" (barred) the road. Neither can the Maori king party pass into Waiapu, because the way is closed by the loyal Natives at Tuparoa. There is nothing further to communicate from these parts. We are still daily employed in our •work. There is not a day without fighting: we do nothing else but fight. No more. From your loving friend, Henaee Potae.

68

DESPATCHES FROM THE GOVERNOR OF NEW

A.—No. 5

No. 60. His Excellency the Govebnoe to the Eight Hon. the Seceetaby of State for the Colonies. Sib, — Government House, "Wellington, 14th July, 1865. I have the honor to transmit copies of a letter, and its enclosures, which I have just received from Sir D. Cameron, stating that he has reported to Earl de Grey that the Colonial Ministers are guilty of improprieties in corresponding with officers under his command, and that he has reported the irregularity I thus allow to the Secretary of State for War. 2. I beg that you will assure Earl de Grey that neither myself, or any member of the Colonial Ministry, would be willingly guilty of any impropriety in corresponding with any officer under General Cameron's command. 3. In this instance Martial Law prevailed in the Province of Taranaki, under the provisions of which the officer in command there exercised extraordinary powers. The state of peace now prevailing there fortunately admitted of my revoking the Proclamation establishing Martial Law, which had been issued by my predecessor, I therefore issued another Proclamation for this purpose, and to prevent the senior military officer at Taranaki from committing any illegal acts under the old Proclamation, after a new one was published, an authenticated copy of the new one was sent to him by the Colonial Secretary, and care was taken that it should only be made public there by himself or under his directions. 4. It is difficult to imagine how this can constitute a grave offence of impropriety and irregularity, which it is necessary to report for the information of the Secretary of State for War ; or why, in a country involved in all the difficulties which spring from civil war, the minds of the authorities should be disturbed by such a question. It should be borne in mind that General Cameron is at Auckland, distant from the seat of Government and the point where disturbances prevail, and if he is in every instance to be applied to, all action must be paralyzed. I have, &c, The Eight Hon. Edward Cardwell, M.P. G. Gbet. Note.—For Despatches N"os. 92, 93, and 94, relative to the Capture of the Weraroa Pa, vide A. No. 7.

No. 91

Vide A. No. 4, pp. 66, 67.

69

ZEALAND TO THE SECRETABY OP STATE.